JP7140065B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at a predetermined position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. a means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means , a first result that the first pattern combination can be stopped at the predetermined position when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode; and a second result in which a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the predetermined position when operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. death,
A mode notification means capable of executing mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode,
A specific state is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed,
a game number grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the specific state;
a specific process execution means capable of executing a specific process related to the mode notification by the mode notification means when the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches a specific number;
a special notification means capable of executing a special notification by a predetermined notification means when the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches the specific number;
with
At least a first game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means and the specific process by the specific process execution means can be executed, and a game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means and the specific process by the specific process execution means cannot be executed . 2 games and
is set and
The game number grasping means grasps the number of games including the first game and the second game,
When the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches the specific number in the second game, and then when the first game is performed, the specific process is executed by the specific process executing means. means capable of making
means capable of executing the special notification by the special notification means when the specific number is reached in the second game and then when the first game is performed;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of a prize mode. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal game state at the time of 3 bets. It is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for normal gaming state when two bets are made. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for bonus states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of various transfer lottery tables. 4 is a flowchart showing AT type determination processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT start game setting processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT addition processing; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT start game determination processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing advantageous section transition game processing; FIG. (a) is a flow chart showing a second section display process, and (b) is a flow chart showing an initialization process for advantageous section information. 9 is a flowchart showing processing for a specific determination area; It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. It is a flow chart which shows processing for continuous production. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing bet number corresponding notification processing; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect and a reel effect by the auxiliary display section; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the number of games for which specific processing relating to the instruction function should be executed is set in the judgment information storage area; FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing chart for explaining how the number of games for which specific processing relating to the instruction function should be executed is set in the judgment information storage area; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing advantageous section transition game processing in the second embodiment. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for AT lottery. 14 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT start game setting processing; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing AT start game determination processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing processing for a specific determination area; It is a flow chart which shows rotation production processing. It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing in a 4th embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing second processing for a specific determination area; It is a flow chart which shows processing for continuous production. FIG. 4 is a timing chart for explaining how specific processing relating to an instruction function is avoided; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing AT start game determination processing in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing specific determination content setting processing; 9 is a flowchart showing processing for a specific determination area; 6 is a flowchart showing specific determination processing; It is a flow chart which shows specific judgment production setting processing. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit;

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 500 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 20 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 25 pulses (=500 pulses/20 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has 20 symbols arranged in a row. Numbers 0 to 19 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (for example, 1st on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (for example, 0th on the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 14th on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (eg, 2nd on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (eg, 8th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (For example, 3rd on the left reel 32L), "Youth" symbol (for example, 18th on the left reel 32L), "Ark shell" symbol (for example, 4th on the left reel 32L), "White shell" symbol (eg, left reel 32L) 19th reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that 3 of the 20 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the upper symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by betting medals and a line that is not activated are set. As winning a prize, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is awarded, or a privilege of shifting the game state is awarded. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In this slot machine 10, among the lines L1 to L6, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. More specifically, in the slot machine 10, the game may be started with three medals betted or the game may be started with two medals betted. When medals are bet and the game is started, only the bend line L6 is set as the valid line, and the other lines L1 to L5 are not set as the valid lines. In the following description, the bend line L6 may be referred to as an effective line ML. In the following description, a 3-bet game is a game that starts with 3 medals bet, a 2-bet game is a game that starts with 2 medals bet, and a 2-bet game starts with 1 medal. The game is also called a one-bet game. Note that in this embodiment, a one-bet game is not set.

8 to 10 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(a), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the first minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a minor winning combination corresponding to the bell has been won.

When the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the second minor win is won. When the second minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(b), when the symbols corresponding to the second minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "bell" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and a small winning combination different from the first small winning combination described above can be achieved due to the difference in the lines on which the "bell" patterns are aligned. It is also understandable that

When the "Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon" symbol or "Red Shell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the third small Awarded for role. When the third minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(c), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the third minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the middle line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first small winning combination and second small winning combination can be easily understood from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the fourth minor winning combination is won. When the fourth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(d), when the symbols corresponding to the winning of the fourth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the upward right line L5. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the above-mentioned first to third small winning combinations can be easily understood from the difference in the line on which the "bell" pattern is aligned. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the fifth minor win is won. When the fifth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(e), when the symbols corresponding to the fifth minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "bell" symbols stop on the lower line L3. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and from the difference in the line where the "bell" pattern is aligned, the above-mentioned 1st small winning combination to the 4th small winning combination. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the sixth minor winning combination is won. When the sixth minor win is established, 13 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 11(f), when the symbols corresponding to the 6th minor winning combination are stopped on the activated line ML, the "Bell" symbol is displayed on the lower stage of the left reel 32L, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the lower stage of the right reel 32R. stops (stops in an Oyama type). Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has been established, and the difference in the stopping position of the "bell" symbol makes it possible for the player to recognize the first to fifth small winning combinations. It is also possible to understand that a small role winning prize different from that has been established.

"Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, "White 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "Ark shell" symbol or "Seinen" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "White 7" symbol and "White shellfish" symbol on the right reel 32R. When the symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the activated line ML, the seventh minor winning combination is won. When the seventh minor win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and three medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(a), when the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols stop on the lower right line L4. Therefore, the player can easily understand that a small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established.

When the "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line ML, the eighth minor win is won. When the eighth minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), when the symbols corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper line L1. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the small winning combination corresponding to the watermelon has been established, and the small winning combination different from the 7th small winning combination described above can be realized due to the difference in the lines where the "watermelon" pattern is aligned. It is also understandable that

The 9th to 32nd small wins are so-called lost wins in which a prize is established mainly when the 1st to 6th small wins are missed. When the 9th minor winning combination to the 32nd minor winning combination are established, one medal is paid out in the 3-bet game, and one medal is paid out in the 2-bet game. The 9th to 32nd small wins are the left reel 32L “Replay” symbol, “Red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “Ark shell” symbol, “White shell” symbol, “Senior” symbol or “Bell” symbol. Designs, middle reel 32M "white 7" design, "cherry" design, "red clam" design, "youth" design, "red 7" design, "watermelon" design, "replay" design, "BAR" design, " Bell" symbol or "white shell" symbol, right reel 32R's "red 7" symbol, "white 7" symbol, "white shell" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "ark shell" symbol, "BAR" " symbol or "replay" symbol and the corresponding combination stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the combination of symbols corresponding to the 9th minor winning prize to the 32nd minor winning prize should all stop with the “Bell” symbols aligned on the straight line (L1 to L5). It is set so that there is no bell, and it is set so that it can be easily understood that the small winning combination corresponding to the bell has not been established.

Incidentally, in the structure in which medals are paid out based on the first to 32nd minor wins, the paid out minor wins are a kind of privilege given according to the game results. In this specification, the paid out medals may also be referred to as paid out balls, and the ratio of the number of paid out medals (outed balls) to the number of inserted (bet) medals is also referred to as the paid out medal rate. Sometimes.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. As shown in FIG. 10, winning symbol combinations are set for each of the first to twelfth replays.

The first replay consists of a "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol, a "white 7" symbol, a "white shell" symbol or a "youth" symbol on the right reel 32R. ” symbols stop on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(c), when the symbols corresponding to the first replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "replay" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the replay winning corresponding to the replay has been established.

In the second replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line ML. Winning will be established. When the symbols corresponding to the second replay winning are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(a), the symbols "BAR" are aligned and stopped on the upward right line L5, or as shown in FIG. 14(b). As shown, the "Red 7" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol stop in order from the left on the upward right line L5. When the second replay win is established, a privilege advantageous to the player may be provided.

In the third replay, the effective line ML is the “Bell” symbol, the “Ark shell” symbol or the “Senior” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “Bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “Bell” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when it stops at the top. When the symbols corresponding to the third replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, as shown in FIG. 14(c), the symbols "WHITE 7" are aligned and stopped on the lower line L3, or as shown in FIG. 14(d). As shown in the figure, the "red 7" symbols are aligned and stopped on the right downward line L4. When the third replay win is established, a privilege advantageous to the player may be provided.

The fourth and fifth re-games are re-games for adjustment when a plurality of re-games wins.

The sixth replay consists of a “bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, a “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a “red 7” symbol, a “white 7” symbol, a “BAR” symbol, and a “cherry” symbol on the right reel 32R. Winning is established when the symbol, the "white shell" symbol or the "young man" symbol stops on the active line ML. As shown in FIG. 12(d), when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the middle reel 32M, while the right reel symbol stops. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32R (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called upper watermelon tenpai is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the sixth replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the lower stage of the right reel 32R, while the "watermelon" symbol appears on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the middle reel 32M), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

In the seventh replay, the left reel 32L has a “bell” symbol, the middle reel 32M has a “white 7” symbol, a “cherry” symbol, a “red clam” symbol or a “youth” symbol, and a right reel 32R has a “watermelon” symbol. Or, when the "red clam" symbol stops on the active line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 12(e), when the symbols corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbols stop on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the upper stage of the right reel 32R. The "watermelon" symbol does not stop on the upper stage of the reel 32M (the "watermelon" symbol stops on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M), so that the so-called "watermelon tenpai" is stopped. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the seventh replay winning prize stops on the activated line ML, the "watermelon" symbol stops on the upper stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "watermelon" symbol stops on the lower stage of the right reel 32R. The symbol does not stop (the "watermelon" symbol stops at the upper stage of the right reel 32R), and the so-called right-sloping watermelon ten pie is stopped.

The eighth replay consists of the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol, the “cherry” symbol, the “red clam” symbol or the “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “replay” symbol on the right reel 32R. and stop on the activated line ML, winning is established. As shown in FIG. 13(a), when the symbols corresponding to the eighth replay win are stopped on the activated line ML, all the "watermelon" symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

In the ninth replay, the "replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol or "red clam" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the activated line ML. Winning will be established. As shown in FIG. 13(b), when the symbols corresponding to the ninth replay winning prize stop on the activated line ML, the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, while the "replay" symbols stop on the middle stage of the middle reel 32M. The "replay" symbol does not stop at the middle stage of the reel 32R (the "bell" symbol stops at the middle stage of the right reel 32R), so that the so-called middle stage replay tenpai stop mode is achieved.

The tenth replay consists of the ``BAR'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white 7'' symbol, the ``BAR'' symbol, the ``cherry'' symbol, the ``red clam'' symbol or the ``young man'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. 'Red 7' pattern, 'White 7' pattern, 'BAR' pattern, 'Cherry' pattern, 'white shell' pattern or 'young man' pattern stops on the effective line ML, winning is established. Also, in the twelfth replay, the "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Bell" symbol, "Watermelon" symbol or "Ark shell" symbol on the right reel 32R are valid. Winning is established when the ball stops on the line ML. As shown in FIGS. 13(c) and 13(d), when the symbols corresponding to the 10th re-game win or 12th re-game win stop on the activated line ML, a "Cherry" symbol appears on the lower stage of the left reel 32L. Stop. When the 10th re-game or 12th re-game is won, if a stop operation is performed aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol stops on the upper stage in the case of winning the 10th re-game. However, in the case of the 12th re-game winning, since the "cherry" symbol stops in the middle or lower row, it is possible to distinguish between the 10th re-game winning and the 12th re-game winning. In the 11th re-game, winning is established when the 10th re-game and 12th re-game cannot be won, that is, when there is a possibility of a loss.

As state transition winning prizes in which only game state transition is performed, there are a first BB winning prize and a second BB winning prize.

When the "white 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white shell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line ML, the first BB win is won. When the first BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(e), when the symbols corresponding to the 1st BB win are stopped on the activated line ML, the white 7 symbols are stopped on the medium line L2.

When the ``white 7'' symbol on the left reel 32L, the ``white shell'' symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the ``BAR'' symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the pay line ML, the second BB wins. When the second BB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second BB state. As shown in FIG. 13(f), when the symbol corresponding to the 2nd BB winning is stopped on the activated line ML, the "WHITE 7" symbol is stopped on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. The "red 7" pattern stops in the middle row.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 15) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting a predetermined specific number of credited virtual tokens as game media at once out of the prescribed number of games. is provided. The specific number is set according to the progress of the game. For example, when the specified number of the game is set to three and the specific number is set to three, if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, three virtual medals will be issued on the condition that there are credits. is inserted, and if the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when the specified number is set as two and the specific number is set as two, two credits are inserted on the condition that there are credits. When the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated when virtual medals are inserted and the prescribed number is set to 3 or 2 and the specific number is set to 3, When three virtual medals are inserted under the condition that there are credits, the specified number is set to three or two, and the specific number is set to two, the first When the credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted on the condition that there are credits. A second credit input switch 57 is provided to the left of the first credit input switch 56 . The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting two virtual medals. The credit insertion switches 56 and 57 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium. Note that the slot machine 10 is not provided with a credit insertion switch for inserting one virtual medal.

The first credit insertion switch 56 has a larger operating surface for the player to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57, and the first credit insertion switch 56 is easier to operate than the second credit insertion switch 57. better than Therefore, normally, it is assumed that the player operates the first credit insertion switch 56 to proceed with the game. In other words, it is considered that the game is usually played by inserting a specified number of coins out of the specified number of coins.

On the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 which is operated when the effect is generated.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the operation order. A direction monitor 68 is provided which has an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps for producing various sound effects and notifying the player of the game state as the game progresses. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is The lower display portion 69 may be configured as a liquid crystal display portion, operation buttons for effects may be provided in the lower display portion 69, or the entire lower display portion 69 may be configured to be operable.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. In other words, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG.

The main controller 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a settlement switch 59. , a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects that a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned on. Various sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104 .

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed by power failure processing (see FIG. 17) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 16, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 serves as a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The input side of the display control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66) and the like. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 17 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set, and when the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 15) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, a timer update process for subtracting/adding the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed on the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, the payout number display section 62, and the instruction monitor 68 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing for supplying the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and displaying corresponding numerals, symbols, etc. is performed. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing ends.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S212 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 2-bet game, 2 virtual medals are executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings have been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 and 57 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 and 57 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the end of the start waiting process, in step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "3" is set as the specified number in the bonus state (BB state), and "2" and "3" are set as the specified numbers in the gaming states other than the bonus state. That is, in the bonus state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of bets is "3", and in other than the bonus state, the condition is that the number of bets is "2" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the bonus state, if no medals have been betted or if the number of bets is "1" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a bet command including the information of the number of bets determined affirmatively in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device in step S206. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The display control device 81 that has received the bet command executes processing for notification based on the bet operation (for example, notification that the game start condition is satisfied, notification of the lottery result in the previous game), and the speaker 64. and the auxiliary display section 65 are controlled.

After executing the processing of step S206, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S207. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the specified number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, only the bend line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. After that, the lottery process of step S210, the reel control process of step S211, and the medal payout process of step S212 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S210 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. In this slot machine 10, game states are roughly divided into a normal game state and a bonus state, and a lottery table is set for each game state. In the normal game state, the prescribed number of bets is set to "3" and "2" as described above. A lottery table for a 2-bet game is set.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the game state flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is displayed. to select. For example, when the number of bets is "3" and none of the bonus state flags are set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state. Select a lottery table. When the current game is a 3-bet game, the normal game state lottery table (FIG. 20) for the 3-bet game is selected, and when the current game is a 2-bet game, the 2-bet game is selected. Select the lottery table for normal game state (Fig. 21). In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing of the RAM 106 . In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 20 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 3-bet game. Also, FIG. 21 is a lottery table for the normal game state that is selected in the normal game state in the 2-bet game. Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, in step S306, a process of setting the winning flag of the game result corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 in the winning flag storage area 106a is executed. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=23, the seventh minor winning flag and the eighth minor winning flag are set in step S306. Also, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=25, the first BB winning flag is set in step S306, and when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=26, in step S306 Set the 2nd BB winning flag.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

In step S306 in a state where the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and a combination other than the 1BB and 2BB is selected. If it is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, when the 1st BB winning flag is carried over and the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=25, the 1st BB winning flag is not set. Further, in a state where the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=11 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 1st minor winning flag, the 9th minor winning flag, the 10th minor winning winning flag, A win flag and a 13th minor win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the 1st BB and the 2nd BB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is an object to be judged, the process returns to step S304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

By the way, when the lottery table shown in FIG. is about 1/27.3 with setting 1, about 1/27.5 with setting 3, about 1/28.3 with setting 6, and the set value is It is set so that the higher it is, the harder it is to win. The probability of winning normal reply B (probability of winning when IV = 2) and the probability of winning normal reply C (probability of winning when IV = 3) are both regardless of the set value It is about 1/26.2. The probability of winning the first chance A (probability of winning when IV=4) is about 1/164 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning the chance B (when IV=5 The probability of winning a prize) is about 1/262 regardless of the set value, and the probability of winning the chance C (probability of winning when IV=6) is about 16400 minutes regardless of the set value. 1, it is set so that the chance B is easier to win than the chance C, and the chance A is easier to win than the chance B. The probability of winning Cherry A (the probability of winning when IV=7) is about 1/107 with setting 1, about 1/104 with setting 3, and about 93.6 with setting 6. It is 1/1, and is set so that the higher the set value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning Cherry B (the probability of winning when IV=8) is about 1/215 regardless of the setting value, and the probability of winning Cherry C (the probability of winning when IV=9). is about 1/13100 regardless of the setting value, and is set so that Cherry B is more likely to win than Cherry C, and Cherry A is more likely to win than Cherry B. . The probability of winning the common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/504 regardless of the set value. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, middle reverse push bell 1, middle push bell 2, reverse pinch bell 1, reverse The probability of winning the sandwiched bell 2, the reverse push bell 1, and the reverse push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as push order bells) (probability of winning when IV = 11 to 22) is a set value about 18.4 times, respectively. The probability of winning the watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1/107 regardless of the set value. The probability of winning the 1st BB (probability of winning when IV = 25) is about 1/5.03 regardless of the set value, and other combinations (replays, small winnings, IV = 1 ~ 24) is set higher than the winning probability. In the 3-bet game, it is set so as not to win the double 1-card hand (IV=24) or the second BB (IV=26) (the corresponding point value PV is set to 0). In the 3-bet game, the probability of not winning any combination including the 1st BB is 0. In the situation where the 1st BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 3-bet game is about 1/5.03 (for the 1st BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 3-bet game, a reduction of about 1.77 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the first BB state (net increase minus about 1.77 medals).

On the other hand, if the lottery table shown in FIG. , chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, and cherry C (probability of winning when IV=1 to 9) is the same probability as the probability The probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV=10) is about 1/9.64 regardless of the set value, and it is easier to win than when playing a 3-bet game. is set to be The pressing order bells (IV=11 to 22) are set so as not to win in a 2-bet game. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=23) is about 1 in 257 regardless of the set value, and is set so that winning is less likely than when playing a 3-bet game. It is In the 2-bet game, it is set so that a duplicate 1-card combination (IV=24) can be won, and the probability is about 1/1.81 regardless of the set value. Also, in the 2-bet game, the first BB (IV=25) is set so as not to win, while the second BB (IV=26) is set to be won, and the probability is set regardless of the set value. is about 1/4.95. In the 2-bet game as well, the probability of not winning any combination including the 2nd BB is zero. In a situation where the 2nd BB is won, the probability of not winning any combination in the 2-bet game is approximately 1/4.95 (for the 2nd BB) regardless of the set value. Incidentally, in a 2-bet game, a reduction of about 0.64 medals per game can be expected, excluding the increase in the second BB (net increase minus about 0.64 medals).

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S308, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S312, a stop information setting process is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery result of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the win flag set in step S306. For example, the 1st minor winning combination winning flag, the 9th minor winning combination winning flag, the 10th minor winning combination winning flag, and the 13th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In this case, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbols corresponding to the 1st, 9th, 10th and 13th minor wins can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Also, if the watermelon is won (winning at IV=23) and the 7th minor winning combination winning flag and the 8th minor winning winning flag are set, the symbols corresponding to the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination winning flag are set. Stop symbol information is set so that can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In this slot machine 10, the 1st BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB is set so that a winning can be established only in a 2-bet game. Therefore, even if the 1BB win flag is set, if the game is started in the 2-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, the stop symbol information that establishes the 1BB win is set. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the first BB winning is performed). Further, even when the 2nd BB winning flag is set, if the game is started in the 3-bet game, in the stop information setting process of step S312, setting of the stop symbol information that establishes the 2nd BB winning will be performed. is not performed (setting of stop symbol information to avoid the second BB winning is performed).

In subsequent step S313, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S312, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, in the situation where the 1BB is won (the 1BB winning flag is set and the 1BB winning is carried over), the watermelon is further won, the 1BB prize, the 7th minor role prize, and the When the stop pattern information corresponding to the 8th minor winning combination is set, the order of priority is set so that the 7th minor winning combination and the 8th minor winning combination are established prior to the 1st BB winning. . In addition, in the situation where the 2nd BB is won (the 2nd BB winning flag is set and the 2nd BB winning is carried over), the normal reply A is won, the 2nd BB prize is won, and the first replay is performed. , 2nd re-game, 3rd re-game and 4th re-game winning are set so that each re-game winning has priority over the 2nd BB winning. Set rank.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

After executing the process of step S313, after executing the section display first process in step S314, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation production process is for performing production using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309, the result of the lottery result correspondence process performed in step S310, etc. processing. The rotation effect processing will be described later in detail. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower position in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol, and if they are equal, reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when the prize is won when IV=11 to 22, that is, when the prize is won on the push order bell (see FIGS. 20 and 21), the stop switch 42 generates a stop command. Stop information second setting processing is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the operation order of 1 to 44.

FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle order push bell 1 is won, each stop switch 42 to 44 is left → middle → right, left → right → middle, middle → right → left, right → left → middle, or right → Stop information is set so that the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination is established when operated in the order of middle → left, and the operation is performed in the order of center → left → right. Stop information is set so that the third minor winning combination is established when the player wins. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42-44 are operated. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of left→middle→right. In such a case, as described above, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the 17th minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination or the 21st minor winning combination.

The 17th minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol. In addition, the 18th minor winning symbol on the left reel 32L is the "ark shell" symbol and the "white shell" symbol. The 21st minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol and the "youth" symbol. The 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols are arranged on the left reel 32L such that the interval between the symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, any one of the 17th, 18th and 21st minor combination symbols is displayed on the effective line (middle row) regardless of the operation timing. Stop. In this slot machine 10, when a plurality of target symbols are operated at a timing at which they can be stopped, stop control is performed so as to stop symbols with a small number of sliding coma on the activated line. That is, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first "bell" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the lower row, the fourth "red clam" symbol (2 It is possible to stop the 5th "Replay" symbol (3 bells), which is the 21st small winning symbol, in the middle row, and the 4th "Ark shell" symbol, which has the lowest number of sliding coma, is in the middle row. Stop control of the left reel 32L is performed so as to stop. In this case, although there is still room for the 18th minor winning combination to be established, the 17th minor winning combination and the 21st minor winning combination will not be established.

When the 18th minor combination symbol on the left reel 32L stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 18th minor combination winning can be established.

The 18th minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol. On the left reel 32L, "replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, in this case, regardless of the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, stop control is performed so that the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M.

The 18th minor winning symbol on the right reel 32R is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol. On the right reel 32R, these symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol is 5 or more symbols. In other words, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, there are cases where the 18th minor winning combination symbol "white shell" or "youth" symbol can be stopped at the upper stage, and there are cases where it cannot be stopped at the upper stage. be. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it can be stopped at the upper stage, the 18th minor winning combination is established, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when it cannot be stopped at the upper stage, the so-called dropout occurs. becomes.

Here, the case where the "red shell" symbol stops on the middle stage of the left reel 32L and the "replay" symbol stops on the upper stage of the middle reel 32M means that the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the 18th small game is won as described above. In addition to the possibility of winning a winning combination, there is also a possibility of winning the 20th minor winning combination by winning the middle-order push bell 2. That is, the 20th minor combination symbol in the middle forward push bell 2 has the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M in common with the 18th minor combination symbol. On the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol is the "white shell" symbol and the "young man" symbol, whereas the 20th minor winning symbol is the "red 7" symbol and the "white 7" symbol. ing. In particular, on the right reel 32R, the 18th minor winning symbol and the 20th minor winning symbol are displayed when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing at which the 18th minor winning symbol can be stopped on the effective line, and the 20th minor winning symbol is displayed. can not be stopped on the effective line, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing at which the 20th minor symbol can be stopped on the effective line, the 18th minor symbol can not be stopped on the effective line. Each of these designs is arranged in the . Therefore, assuming that it is not known whether the middle-order pushing bell 1 or the middle-order pushing bell 2 is won, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are stopped, and the 18th minor winning combination is won. And even if it is in a stop mode in which there is a possibility of winning the 20th minor combination, it cannot be aimed at and won.

Next, an example will be described in which the middle forward push bell 1 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of middle→left→right. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the third minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, "replay" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the "replay" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "replay" symbol is stopped on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "Bell" symbols, which are the third minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "Bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol and the "red clam" symbol, which are the third minor winning symbols, are arranged so that the interval between these symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "watermelon" symbol or the "red clam" symbol stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. As shown above, if the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 3rd minor win is established regardless of the operation timing. do.

As described above, in the case of winning the push order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order, regardless of the operation timing, the first minor winning prize, the first winning prize, etc. If a 2nd minor win, 3rd minor win, 4th minor win, 5th minor win, or 6th minor win win is established and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a different order of operation, that Depending on the timing of the operation, other minor wins will be established, or none of the minor wins will be established and will be lost. By the way, if you win the common bell, regardless of the operation order and operation timing, you will receive the 1st minor role, 2nd minor role, 3rd minor role, 4th minor role, and 5th minor role. , or the 6th minor winning combination is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, the bonus state process is performed in step S414. Bonus state processing will be described in detail later. After executing the bonus state process, a winning result handling process is executed in step S415. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S416. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control processing ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S212 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first to twelfth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, the re-game setting process for changing the game mode to the re-game mode is performed. , to end the medal payout process. In addition, in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game mode is the replay mode.

On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotating plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the bonus state processing of step S414 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the first BB state or the second BB state. Whether it is in the first BB state or the second BB state depends on the presence or absence of the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 when shifting to the first BB state or the second BB state. It is identifiable. That is, in step S501, if neither the first BB state flag nor the second BB state flag is set, it is determined that the state is neither the first BB state nor the second BB state, and the process proceeds to step S502.

In step S502, the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is set, and it is determined whether or not any BB is won. If none of the BB winning flags is set, the bonus state processing is terminated. If any BB winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, a process of inputting 3 to a MAX bet counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The MAX bet counter is for setting a specific number of virtual medals to be inserted when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated. That is, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated in a situation where 3 is input to the MAX bet counter, three virtual medals are inserted. In this case, the MAX bet counter does not set the prescribed number of games. It is permissible to play a 2-bet game. If 3 has already been input to the MAX bet counter in step S503, that state is maintained.

The initial value of the MAX bet counter is 2, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, 2 is input to the MAX bet counter and the slot machine 10 is activated.

In the subsequent step S504, it is determined whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established. If any BB winning has not been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If any BB winning has been established, the process proceeds to step S505 to determine whether or not the first BB winning has been established.

When the 1st BB winning has been established, in step S506, a process of inputting "15" to the BB counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The BB counter is a counter for defining the maximum number of payouts in each BB state. That is, by inputting "15" to the BB counter in step S506, the first BB state is set to end when 15 or more medals are paid out. In step S507, the first BB winning flag is cleared. Then, in step S508, the first BB state flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As a result, from the next game onwards, an affirmative determination is made in step S501. In the subsequent step S509, a process of setting the first BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The first BB start command is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that the first BB state is to be started. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that the first BB start effect corresponding to . Further, by receiving the first BB start command, the display control device 81 can grasp that the next game is in the first BB state. It controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like.

After setting the output of the first BB start command in step S509, the process of setting the specified number of bets to 3 is executed in step S510, and then this bonus state process ends. The prescribed number of bets corresponds to the prescribed number of coins for the above game. That is, by shifting to the first BB state, the prescribed number of coins for the game is set to three, and the first BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

Note that the default bet numbers are 2 and 3, and when the reset switch 72 is operated to clear the RAM, the prescribed bet numbers are set to 2 and 3 and the slot machine 10 is activated.

The case where it is determined in step S505 that the 1st BB prize has not been established means that the 2nd BB prize has been established. In this case, the process advances to step S511 to execute the process of inputting "15" to the BB counter. That is, it is set so that the second BB state ends when 15 or more medals are paid out. Then, in step S512, the process of clearing the second BB winning flag is executed, and in step S513, the process of setting the second BB status flag is executed. After that, in step S514, a process of setting the second BB start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The second BB start command corresponds to the first BB start command, and is a command for making the display control device 81 grasp that the second BB state is started. Upon receiving the second BB start command, the display control device 81 controls the speaker 64, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. so that the second BB start effect corresponding to the start of the second BB state is performed, and from the next game onwards, the second BB start effect is performed. The speaker 64, the auxiliary display section 65, etc. are controlled so that the 2BB state effect is performed. The appearance and contents of the first BB start effect and the second BB start effect are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them. Also, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different in appearance and content to the extent that the player can distinguish between them. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 when the first BB start command and the second BB start command are received will be described later in detail.

After setting the output of the second BB start command in step S514, the process of setting the prescribed bet number to 3 is executed in step S510, and then the bonus state process is terminated. That is, the specified number of coins is set to 3 not only in the first BB state but also in the second BB state, and the second BB state is performed in a 3-bet game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S501 and the state is the first BB state or the second BB state, the process advances to step S515 to perform processing during the first BB state or the second BB state. FIG. 25 shows an example of a lottery table for BB status. In this embodiment, a common lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state. may In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, in the first BB state and the second BB state, it is set so that the normal reply A, the common bell, and the duplicate one-card combination can be won. The probability of winning a regular reply A (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1/61.2, and the probability of winning a common bell (probability of winning when IV = 10) is about It is 1/5.96, and the probability of winning a duplicate 1-card role (probability of winning when IV=24) is about 1/1.31. In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the probability of winning no winning combination is about 1/10.14. In this case, an increase of about 0.00 medals can be expected per game (net increase plus or minus about 0.00), and no increase or decrease in medals occurs in the first BB state or the second BB state. In other words, in the first BB state and the second BB state, although the number of medals cannot be expected to increase, the game can be progressed without reducing the number of medals.

Here, in the normal game state in the 3-bet game and in the 1 BB state that can be transitioned to in the 3-bet game, the main increase in medals is the 1st to 6th minor wins in which 13 coins are paid out. The combination is the pressing order bell in the normal game state, and the common bell in the first BB state. Comparing the winning rates of these main minor wins, in the normal game state, assuming that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a certain order, the probability of winning is about 1/9.19. On the other hand, in the first BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and in the 3-bet game, the first BB state is set so that winning is more likely to occur than in the normal game state. In addition, in both the normal game state in the 2-bet game and the second BB state that can be transitioned to in the 2-bet game, the main medal increase is the common bell, and the probability in the normal game state is about 1/9.64. In the second BB state, the probability of winning is about 1/5.96, and even in the 2-bet game, winning is more likely to occur in the 2 BB state than in the normal game state. is set.

However, as described above, even if the first BB state and the second BB state are eliminated, the number of medals held cannot be expected to increase.

In the bonus state process, in step S515, it is determined whether or not any minor combination has been won in the current game as a result of the lottery process by the lottery table for the BB state and each reel control. If no winning has been established, the bonus state processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been established, in step S516, a process of subtracting the number of payouts corresponding to the winning from the BB counter of the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S517, it is determined whether or not the BB counter has become 0 or less as a result of the subtraction processing in step S516. For example, if a common bell is won and the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination are established, 13 coins will be paid out, so in step S516, 13 is subtracted from the BB counter.

If it is determined in step S517 that it is not equal to or less than 0, the bonus state processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined to be 0 or less, a process of clearing the BB state flag corresponding to the current BB state is performed in step S518. That is, the first BB state flag is cleared in the first BB state, and the second BB state flag is cleared in the second BB state. Then, in step S519, a process of inputting 2 to the MAX bet counter is executed, and in step S520, a BB end command corresponding to the BB state to end this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. More specifically, the output of the first BB end command is set to end the first BB state, and the output of the second BB end command is set to end the second BB state. The display control device 81 that has received the first BB end command or the second BB end command controls the speaker 64 and the auxiliary display section 65 so that the first BB end effect and the second BB end effect are performed. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 when the first BB end command and the second BB end command are received will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S521, after setting the prescribed bet numbers to 2 and 3, this bonus state processing is terminated. In this case, a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible in the normal game state after the end of the first BB state and the second BB state. On the other hand, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter in step S519 as described above, when the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated, two virtual medals are inserted and a 2-bet game is performed. The game will be played at In other words, in a situation where neither the 1st BB winning flag nor the 2nd BB winning flag is set, the game is set so that the 2-bet game can be easily played. Incidentally, after the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state are finished, since 2 is input to the MAX bet counter, it is not possible to bet 3 cards by operating the first credit insertion switch 56 or the second credit insertion switch 57. Three medals must be inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 in order to play the betting game.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, game characteristics using a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

The normal game state in which neither the first BB winning flag nor the second BB winning flag is set and neither BB is won is a so-called non-internal state. In this case, as described above, the prescribed number of bets (the prescribed number of coins for the game) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 2 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a two bet game.

In the non-internal state, a 3-bet game can win the 1st BB but not the 2nd BB, and a 2-bet game can win the 2nd BB but not the 1st BB. In the game in which the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated as described above, winning of the 2nd BB can basically occur in the 2-bet game.

When the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won and no winning is established in the winning game, the internal state (carry-over state) in which the 1st BB or the 2nd BB win is carried over. Also in the internal state, as described above, the specified bet number (the specified number of games) is set to 2 and 3, and a 2-bet game and a 3-bet game are possible. However, when 3 is input to the MAX bet counter as described above and the first credit insertion switch 56 is operated to start the game, the game becomes a 3 bet game.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the internal state in which the 1BB is won, the reels are arranged so that the 1BB win is possible in the 3-bet game, while the 1BB win is not established in the 2-bet game. Stop control of 32L, 32M and 32R is performed. In addition, in the internal state in which the 2nd BB is won, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop so that the 2nd BB winning is not established in the 3-bet game, while the 2nd BB winning is established in the 2-bet game. done. In other words, when winning the 1st BB in a 3-bet game, if the 3-bet game is continued as it is, the 1st BB can be won. cannot be established. Also, when winning the 2nd BB in a 2-bet game, if the 2-bet game is continued as it is, the 2nd BB can be won. cannot be established. The first BB and the second BB will not be elected redundantly, the first BB will not be elected again in the situation where the first BB election is carried over, and the second BB will not be elected redundantly. In addition, in the situation where the second BB election is carried over, the second BB is not elected again, and the first BB is not repeatedly elected. In other words, if the 2-bet game is played when the 1st BB is won, the game continues in the internal state in which the 1st BB win is carried over, and when the 2nd BB is won, the 3-bet game is played. Then, the game in the internal state in which the winning of the second BB is carried over continues endlessly.

Here, as described above, the 1st BB win is established only in the 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win is established only in the 2-bet game. Even if the bet game does not win any role, the 2nd BB prize will not be established. Even so, the first BB prize will not be established. By doing so, it is possible to dramatically simplify the combination structure and the control of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the internal state in which the winning of the 1st BB and the winning of the 2nd BB are carried over. If there is a structure in which the 2nd BB win can be established in a 3-bet game, or a structure in which the 1st BB win can be established in a 2-bet game, the internal state of the 1st BB win or the 2nd BB win is carried over. This is because, in order to continue the game, it is necessary to create a lottery table that does not result in a loss, and for example, in a combination that may be lost, it is necessary to win another combination when the combination is lost.

In addition, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the common bell is the main combination for increasing medals. In addition, in the non-internal state and internal state, the common bell is the main role to increase the medals in the 2-bet game, whereas the main role to increase the medals in the 3-bet game is the pushing order bell. . Regarding the common bell, any one of the 1st to 6th small wins can be won regardless of the operation order or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. , the small combination to be won differs depending on the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 . In other words, compared to the 1BB state and the 2BB state, the non-internal state and internal state in the 3-bet game have more fluctuations in medal increase/decrease due to the operation order and operation timing (mainly the operation order) when the bell is won. is big. Then, for example, AT mode (assist time mode, navigation mode) that assists the winning by notifying the operation sequence (Fig. 25) of winning the 1st to 6th minor wins when the bell is won in the order of pressing. By switching between non-AT mode (non-navigation mode) and non-AT mode (non-navigation mode), it is possible to create a state in which medals increase and a state in which medals decrease depending on the presence or absence of the notification (assist).

As a basic flow of the game for operating the first credit input switch 56, first, in the non-internal state, a 2-bet game is played, and the 2-bet game is won in the 2-bet game. When the 2nd BB is won, an internal state is entered, the game is switched to a 3-bet game, and the game proceeds while the above-mentioned 2nd BB winning cannot be established. In this case, as described above, in the 3-bet game in which the 2nd BB winning is carried over, the 1st BB is neither won nor the 2nd BB is won. will be continued.

Hereinafter, on the premise that the game is carried over with the 2nd BB winning, the game (in the following description, also referred to as a normal game) will be described as a game feature using notification (push order notification) at the time of winning the push order bell. explain.

<Lottery result handling process>
First, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 27, the lottery result handling process performed in step S310 will be described. The lottery result handling process is a process that is executed after the lottery process for each game is performed, and is a process that performs a lottery for shifting to the AT mode in which push order notification is generated based on the lottery result of the game.

First, in steps S601 to S603, a process of ascertaining the number of bets for the game to be started this time is executed. That is, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S602. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S603. As already explained, in the non-internal state before winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, or in the internal state after winning the 1st BB or the 2nd BB, 2 and 3 are set as the prescribed bet numbers. In the state, 3 is set as the prescribed number of bets. The processing of steps S602 and S603 is processing for determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is one specific prescribed number (specific set number) prescribed (set) in association with the gaming state. , and if there is no specific specified number, the lottery result handling process is terminated without performing the display mode process (the instruction function process) from step S604 onward.

That is, in the non-internal state and the internal state, the process for the display mode is executed in the 3-bet game, while the process for the display mode is not executed in the 2-bet game. In the first BB state and the second BB state, since 3 is set as the specified bet number, the two-bet game is not executed, and the display mode processing is not executed in the first BB state and the second BB state.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the internal state is a 2-bet game, the lottery for transition to the AT mode after step S604 is not performed, which is disadvantageous to the player. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier to play the internal state in the 3-bet game and carry over the second BB to the normal game.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In the slot machine 10, regarding the presence or absence of occurrence of the push order notification, etc., an advantageous section in which the push order notice or the like can occur and a normal section in which the push order notification or the like cannot occur are set. The advantageous section flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game is an advantageous section, and is set upon transition to the advantageous section, and cleared upon transition to the normal section.

If the advantageous section flag is not set, it means that the current game is in the normal section. In this case, the advantageous section transition lottery process is executed in step S605, and then the lottery result handling process is terminated.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the lottery result of the current game is grasped in step S701. Then, in step S702, the advantageous section transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 30, in the advantageous zone transition lottery table, the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) is set according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 30, as a trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, normal reply A, normal reply B, normal reply C, chance A, chance B, chance C, cherry A, cherry B, Cherry C, common bell, push order bell, and watermelon are set. That is, in the normal game as a 3-bet game carrying over the 2nd BB, all results that can be won are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S702, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S703. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as the random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S704, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step S705, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the lottery table is set so that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won with a probability of 100% regardless of the trigger. In this case, if it is determined that the game result ascertained in step S701 is the trigger for the transition lottery (not the result of losing), the processing of steps S702 to S705 can be omitted.

If it is determined in step S705 that the transfer lottery has been won, in step S706, a process of setting an advantageous zone winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current game has won the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or after the process of step S706 is executed, the advantageous zone shift lottery process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S604 that the advantageous section flag is set, the process proceeds to step S606. In step S606, it is determined whether or not any of the precursor flag, the first AT mode flag, and the second AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. Here, in the present embodiment, a first AT mode and a second AT mode with different odds of winning additional prizes are set as the AT mode. This is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp the above, and is set when shifting to the AT mode. Also, the portent flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the transition to the AT mode is confirmed, and the situation is before the AT mode transition. . If neither flag is set in step S606, AT lottery processing is executed in step S607. On the other hand, if any flag is set in step S606, AT addition processing is executed in step S608.

<AT lottery process>
First, the AT lottery process in step S607 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S801, a process of subtracting 1 from the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The ceiling counter is a counter for causing the transition to the AT mode regardless of the suitability of the AT mode transition lottery (without winning) when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games. The number of ceiling games is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section. By the way, as described above, the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. It is deducted in some games and not in e.g. 2bet games.

After executing the subtraction process of the ceiling counter in step S801, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter has reached 0 in step S802. If it has not reached 0, the AT mode transition lottery process is executed in steps S803 to S810.

That is, in step S803, a process of grasping the lottery result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a normal mode and a CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is easier to win than the normal mode are set as display modes with different winning probabilities of the AT mode transition lottery, and the CZ mode flag is set to the CZ mode. This is a flag for the CPU to recognize that it is.

If the CZ mode flag is not set at step S804, then at step S805, a process of acquiring a normal AT mode transition lottery table from the various table storage area 105a is executed. On the other hand, if the CZ mode flag is set in step S804, it is determined in step S806 whether or not the CZ end flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The CZ end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the CZ mode end condition has already been satisfied, but the CZ mode has not yet ended. If the CZ end flag is set, the process of clearing the CZ mode flag and the CZ end flag is executed in step S807, and then the process of acquiring the ordinary AT mode transition lottery table is executed in step S805. do. If the CZ end flag is not set, then in step S808, a process of acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is executed.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the normal AT mode transition lottery table and the CZ AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is set according to the lottery result of the game. If it is an AT mode transition lottery triggered by eye A, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 1% for normal use, and if it is for CZ, it will be an AT mode transition lottery with a probability of 3%. The AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is set so that it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ. Also, the normal reply A, normal reply B and normal reply C are set so that the normal reply does not win the AT mode transition, while the CZ reply may win the AT mode transition.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is acquired in step S805 or step S808, AT mode transition lottery processing is performed in step S809 using the acquired lottery table for transition and the lottery result of the game ascertained in step S803. to run. Then, in step S810, it is determined whether or not the AT mode shift win has been made.

If it is determined at step S810 that the AT mode transition is won, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0 at step S802, the AT mode winning process of steps S811 to S817 is executed. Also, if it is determined in step S810 that the AT mode transition win has not been made, a process for AT mode non-win win is executed in steps S818 to S824.

In the AT mode winning process, in step S811, an AT type determination process is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first AT mode and the second AT mode with different winning probabilities are provided as AT modes. This is a process for determining whether to switch to the second AT mode or to switch to the second AT mode.

<AT type determination processing>
Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 31, AT type lottery processing is executed in step S901. In the AT type lottery process, for example, according to the set value set in the winning probability setting process, the type of the previous AT mode, the number of medals increased in the advantageous interval, the number of games in the advantageous interval, etc., or randomly The AT mode type this time will be determined by lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the set value for the payout rate is set, the easier it is for the second AT mode to be selected. This time, the second AT mode may be easily selected, and although the second AT mode is normally difficult to select, once the second AT mode is selected, the next AT mode is also likely to be selected. Alternatively, the second AT mode may be easily selected in a scene where the number of medals increases or the number of games is small at the beginning of the advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S901, it is determined in step S902 whether the result of the process of step S901 is the first AT mode. If it is the first AT mode, a process of setting the first AT flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S903, and a process of setting the first AT command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S904. After that, the AT type determination process is terminated. The first AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp the situation before shifting to the first AT mode. Processing on the display control device 81 side when the first AT command is received will be described later in detail.

If it is the second AT mode in step S902, a process of setting the second AT flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S905, and the second AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S906. After executing the processing for determining the type of AT, the AT type determination processing ends. The second AT flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize the situation before transition to the second AT mode. Processing on the display control device 81 side when the second AT command is received will be described later in detail.

In the AT lottery process, after the AT type determination process is executed in step S811, the AT start game setting process is executed in step S812. In the present embodiment, after the transition to the AT mode is confirmed, the AT mode is transitioned to after the precursor game is played. In the AT start game setting process, the number of precursor games to be transitioned to the AT mode is set. processing. Incidentally, in the precursor game before shifting to the AT mode, a continuous effect is performed on the auxiliary display section 65 or the like as a suggestive effect suggesting that the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has been won.

<AT start game setting process>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, in the AT start game setting process, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the current AT mode transition win is triggered by reaching the ceiling game. More specifically, when the ceiling counter is 0, an affirmative determination is made in step S1001. When the AT mode transition is won with the arrival of the ceiling game as a trigger, in step S1002, a process of acquiring the number of precursor games table for the ceiling from the various table storage area 105a is executed. If it is determined in step S1001 that the timing is not triggered by reaching the ceiling game, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the AT mode transition winning in the CZ mode is won. More specifically, if the CZ mode flag is set, affirmative determination is made in step S1003. If the AT mode transition win is made in the normal mode instead of the CZ mode, then in step S1004, a normal precursor game number table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a.

Comparing the number of precursor games table for ceiling and the number of precursor games table for normal use, as shown in FIG. is set so that the number of precursor games is likely to be shorter than the number of precursor games selected in . Specifically, for the ceiling, the number of precursor games of 1 to 5 is selected, If it is for normal use, it is set so that the number of premonitory games of 5 to 10 games is selected.

After the precursor game number table is acquired in step S1002 or step S1004, the precursor game number lottery process is executed in step S1005 to determine the current number of precursor games by lottery. In the subsequent step S1006, a process of grasping the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section is executed. The number of games after shifting to the advantageous interval can be grasped by the number of games in the advantageous interval AG provided in various counter areas 106e. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG is counted at the time of transition to the advantageous interval, and is incremented by one each time one game is played in the advantageous interval. Then, in step S1007, the number of precursor games determined by lottery in step S1005 is added to the current number of games in the advantageous section AG, and the value is used for AT start determination provided in the determination information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. Executes the process to fill in the area. In the present embodiment, when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches the value entered in the AT start determination area, a transition to the AT mode is permitted. It can be said that this is the process of setting the game in the interval. For example, if the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section is 50 and the number of precursory games determined by the precursory game number lottery process is 8, 58 is input to the AT start determination area, and the number of games in the advantageous section is entered. When AG becomes 58, the transition to AT mode is permitted.

By the way, the initial setting value set in the AT start determination area after the initialization processing of the RAM 106 and the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous interval is 1501, and the number of games that is larger than the upper limit number of games of the advantageous interval is set. .

If it is determined in step S1003 that the AT mode transition win has been made in the CZ mode, then in step S1008, a process of grasping the number of remaining games in the CZ mode by means of a CZ counter is executed. The CZ counter is a counter to which a value (10) corresponding to the number of games to be played in the CZ mode is input when switching to the CZ mode, and which is decremented by 1 each time one game is played in the CZ mode. In step S1009, similarly to step S1006, processing for grasping the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is executed. Then, in step S1010, the number of remaining games in the CZ mode grasped in step S1008 is set as the number of precursor games, the number of precursor games is added to the current number of games in the advantageous section AG, and the value is added to the AT start determination area. Execute the input process. Like step S1007, the process of step S1010 also corresponds to the process of setting the game during the advantageous section in which the AT mode start process is performed. For example, if the number of games after moving to the advantageous section is 50 and the number of games remaining in the CZ mode is 8, 58 is entered in the AT start determination area, and when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches 58, AT Mode transitions will be allowed.

After setting the game for starting the AT mode in step S1007 or step S1010, the process of setting the precursor flag is executed in step S1011. Then, in step S1012, after executing the process of setting the portent command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the AT start game setting process is terminated. The portent command includes information on the number of portent games. The processing on the display control device 81 side when the portent command is received will be described later in detail.

In the AT lottery process, after the AT start game setting process is executed in step S812, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in step S813. If it is set, a process of clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in step S814. If a negative determination is made in step S813, or after the process of step S814 is executed, the process for the special zone is executed in steps S815 to S817. A special zone is a mode in which the number of games in the AT mode is likely to be increased.

That is, in step S815, a process for grasping the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is executed. Execute the process of inputting the value with 10 added. Then, in step S817, after executing the process of setting the specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the AT lottery process ends. In this embodiment, the special zone ends when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches the value entered in the specialization end determination area. It can be said that this is processing for setting the game inside. For example, if the number of games after moving to the advantageous section is 50, 60 is entered in the specialization end determination area, and when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches 60, the specialization zone ends.

By the way, after the initialization of the RAM 106 and the initialization at the end of the advantageous interval, the initial setting value set in the specialization end determination area is 1501, and the number of games set is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous interval. be.

If it is determined in step S810 that the AT mode transition lottery was not won, it is determined in step S818 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the AT lottery process is terminated. If the CZ mode flag is not set, the CZ mode shift processing is executed in steps S819 to S824.

That is, in step S819, a CZ mode transition lottery process is executed. In the CZ mode transition lottery process, the CZ mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and whether or not to shift to the CZ mode is determined by lottery using the lottery result of the game ascertained in step S803. . As shown in FIG. 30, the CZ mode transition lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery differs according to the lottery result of the game. It is set so that the easier the game lottery result is, the easier it is to win the CZ mode transition lottery. In other words, in spite of the lottery result of the game in which it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, it is set so that it is easy to shift to the CZ mode. there is

After executing the CZ mode shift lottery process in step S819, it is determined in step S820 whether or not the CZ mode shift lottery was won, and if not, the AT lottery process is ended as it is. In the case of CZ mode transition winning, in step S821, the process of grasping the number of games AG in the advantageous section is executed, and in step S822, the current status is stored in the CZ end determination area provided in the determination information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. A process of inputting a value obtained by adding 10 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is executed. Then, in step S823, a process of setting the CZ mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed, and in step S824, a process of setting the CZ command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed. The AT lottery process ends. In this embodiment, the CZ mode is terminated when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches the value entered in the CZ end determination area. can be said to be the process of setting For example, if the number of games after shifting to the advantageous section is 50, 60 is entered in the CZ end determination area, and when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches 60, the CZ mode ends.

By the way, the initial setting value set in the CZ end determination area after the initialization processing of the RAM 106 and the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous interval is 1501, and the number of games larger than the upper limit number of games of the advantageous interval is set. .

<Processing for adding AT>
Next, the AT addition processing executed in step S608 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the AT addition process is a process that is executed when the precursor flag or any of the AT mode flags is set, and is a process for adding the number of continuous AT mode games.

In the AT addition process, first, in step S1101, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S1102, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set. If the specialized zone flag is not set, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the first AT flag or the first AT mode flag is set. If the 1st AT flag or 1st AT mode flag is set and the transition to the 1st AT mode is confirmed or the 1st AT mode is in progress, in step S1104, the 1st AT flag is stored from various table storage areas 105a. Execute the process of acquiring the additional lottery table for use. On the other hand, if the first AT flag or the first AT mode flag is not set in step S1103 and the transition to the second AT mode is confirmed or if the second AT mode is in progress, the second AT mode is selected in step S1105. Execute the process of acquiring the additional lottery table for use. Also, if the specialized zone flag is set in step S1101, it is determined in step S1106 whether or not the specialization end flag is set in the flag storage area 106d. The specialization end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the specialization zone has not yet ended although the specialization zone end condition has already been satisfied. If the specialization end flag is set, the process of clearing the specialization zone flag and the specialization end flag is executed in step S1107, and then each AT addition lottery table is processed in steps S1103 to S1105. Perform the processing to acquire. If the specialization end flag is not set in step S1106, a process of acquiring the additional lottery table for specialization zone is executed in step S1108.

As shown in FIG. 35, each additional lottery table has an additional winning percentage set according to the lottery result of the game. A lottery result in which it is more difficult to win in the lottery process of each game, such as cherry C being more likely to win an additional lottery, is set to be more likely to win an additional lottery. Also, when comparing the same lottery results, it is easier to win the additional lottery when using the additional lottery table for the 2nd AT than when using the additional lottery table for the 1st AT. It is set so that it is easier to win the additional lottery when using the additional lottery table for the special zone than when using the additional lottery table.

After acquiring the additional lottery table in step S1104, step S1105 or step S1108, an additional lottery is executed in step S1109, and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery is won in step S1110. When the addition lottery is not won, the AT addition processing is terminated as it is. If the addition lottery is won, an addition game number lottery process is executed in step S1111. In the add-on game number lottery process, the add-on game number table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and the current add-on game number is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 35, the add-on game number table is set so that the add-on game number differs according to the lottery result of the game that triggered the add-on. On the other hand, if Cherry A is used as a trigger, an average of 15 games will be added on average. It is set so that the number of additional games is larger in the case.

After executing the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step S1111, the process of adding the number of additional games this time to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed in step S1112. The AT counter is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the number of remaining AT mode games. After executing the process of step S1112, after executing the process of setting the add-on command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1113, the AT add-on process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command executes processing for performing the add-on notification effect corresponding to the addition performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 .

In the lottery result handling process (FIG. 27), after the process of step S607 or step S608 is executed, the process of notifying the pressing order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is executed in steps S609 to S612.

<Overview of push order notification>
Prior to the explanation of the pressing order notification processing executed in steps S609 to S612, an outline of the pressing order notification executed by the instruction monitor 68 and the pressing order notification effect executed by the auxiliary display section 65 will be described. will be explained. Note that the pressing order notification and the pressing order notification effect can also be called, for example, pressing order navigation, order notification, and state notification. The instruction monitor 68 is connected to the main control device 101, and the main control device 101 gives notification of the pressing order. On the other hand, the auxiliary display section 65 is connected to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 performs the pressing order notification effect.

First, the configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 36(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and layout as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 36(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player to obtain a winning mode. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. In addition, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By operating the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit up in the game in which the start condition is met when a predetermined start condition including an informing condition in which it is possible to shift to an advantageous section and a push order informing can occur is met. . Also, when the AT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, an advantageous section (specific game state, specific mode) is defined as a section in which the player can easily win a prize in an advantageous manner by being easily notified of the operation order of the push order bell, etc., and the eighth display segment N8 is: In the advantageous section, it lights up during the specific section where the benefits of the push order notification can actually be obtained, and turns off during the normal section that is not the advantageous section or the non-specific section that is not the specific section even if it is the advantageous section. It constitutes a section indicator (specific notification means).

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display displays the payout number on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, etc., and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who advances the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

Next, the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example the case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 37(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, of the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

Explaining the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

The processing for notifying the pressing order in steps S609 to S612 will be described.

That is, in step S609, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game this time is that the pressing order of the bell has been won. If the bell is won in the pressing order, it is determined in step S610 whether or not the first AT mode flag or the second AT mode flag is set. If any of the AT mode flags is set, in step S611, an instruction is given to perform push order notification corresponding to the 1st minor winning combination to the 6th minor winning combination according to the type of the current pressing order bell. Control monitor 68; Then, in step S612, after executing the process of setting the push order notification command including information on the operation order corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes as an output target to the display control device 81. , terminates the actual pressing order notification process. The display control device 81 that has received this pressing order notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so that the pressing order notification effects corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes are performed.

If it is determined in step S609 that the bell has not been won in the pressing order, or if none of the AT mode flags have been set in step S610, the lottery result handling process is terminated.

<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, the winning result handling process executed in step S415 in the reel control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the winning result handling process, a process for starting or ending the AT mode is performed according to the game result of the game.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the first BB state flag or the second BB state flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in one of the BB states. conduct. If it is not in the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 in step S1202. Also, in the case of the BB state, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S1203. That is, the processing of steps S1201 to S1203 is processing corresponding to the processing of steps S601 to S603, and it is determined whether or not it is one specific prescribed number that is prescribed in association with the gaming state. processing. If it is not the specific prescribed number, the processing for the winning result is terminated without performing the processing for the display mode (processing for the instruction function) after step S1204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1202 or step S1203 and the number of bets is the specific prescribed number, the process proceeds to step S1204. In step S1204, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. The case where the portent flag is set means that after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the transition to the AT mode has not yet occurred. In this case, AT start game determination processing is executed in step S1205. The AT start game determination process is a process for executing a specific process related to the instruction function using information stored in the AT start determination area in the determination information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. FIG.

<AT Start Game Judgment Processing>
In the AT start game determination processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. It is determined whether or not the number AG is greater than or equal to the value (the number of games) set in the AT start determination area. If the number of games in the advantageous section AG is equal to or greater than the value of the AT start determination area, it is determined that the AT mode start process is to be performed, and steps S1302 to S1309 are performed. On the other hand, if the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is less than the value of the AT start determination area, the present AT start game determination processing is terminated as it is.

In step S1302, processing for clearing the precursor flag is executed. Then, in step S1303, a process of adding "50" to the AT counters provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. As already explained, the AT counter is a counter corresponding to the number of remaining games in the AT mode. set as a game.

After executing the process of step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set in step S1304, and if it is set, the process of clearing the first AT flag is executed in step S1305. do. Then, in step S1306, processing for setting the first AT mode flag is executed. If the first AT flag is not set in step S1304, it means that the second AT flag is set. In this case, the process of clearing the second AT flag is executed in step S1307. Then, in step S1308, processing for setting the second AT mode flag is executed.

After executing the process of step S1306 or step S1308, in step S1309, after executing the process of setting the AT start command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this AT start game determination process ends. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the AT start command will be described later in detail.

In the winning result handling process, if a negative determination is made in step S1204 or after the process of step S1205 is executed, it is determined in step S1206 whether or not any AT mode flag is set. If any AT mode flag is set, the process for ending the AT mode is executed in steps S1207 to S1211.

That is, in step S1207, a process of subtracting 1 from the AT counter is executed. Then, in step S1208, it is determined whether or not the AT counter has become 0, and if it has become 0, processing for clearing the corresponding AT mode flag is executed in step S1209. Then, in step S1210, a process of setting an AT mode end flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The AT mode end flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the AT mode has ended. After that, in step S1211, after executing the process of setting the AT end command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, the winning result corresponding process is ended. Processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the AT end command will be described later in detail. If none of the AT mode flags is set in step S1206 or if the AT counter is not 0 in step S1208, the winning result handling process is terminated.

<Management of advantageous sections>
Next, section display first processing and section display second processing for controlling the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator, transitioning to an advantageous section, and ending the advantageous section will be described.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S314 in the lottery process (FIG. 19), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As already explained, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case where, among the advantageous sections, the case is a specific section in which at least the notification condition that the push order notification can occur is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1401 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the advantageous section flag has not been set, it is determined in step S1403 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1404. Then, in step S1405, processing for setting the advantageous section flag is executed.

In step S1406, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e is started. As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval. Then, in step S1407, an advantageous section transition game process is executed.

<Advantageous Section Transition Game Processing>
In the advantageous section transition game process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 41, the process of acquiring the ceiling table from the various table storage area 105a is executed in step S1501. In the ceiling table, for example, the number of ceiling games is set with a lower limit value of 100 and an upper limit value of 999, and the selection rate of each game is set. The number of highly selected games such as 800, 999, which are likely to be selected in units of about 100 games, It is set so that there is a low selection game number such as 901 to 998 that is difficult to be selected. Note that the number of games not selected may be included between the lower limit and the upper limit. Also, the lower limit value and the upper limit value are merely examples, and the lower limit value may be smaller than that, and the upper limit value may be larger than that. The selection rate of each game may differ depending on the set value set in the winning probability setting process.

In step S1502, based on the ceiling table obtained in step S1501, the number of ceiling games to be shifted to AT mode without winning the AT mode transition lottery is determined by lottery in the advantageous section to be shifted this time. Then, in step S1503, the processing result of step S1502 is input to the ceiling counters provided in the various counter areas 106e. After executing the processing for the advantageous interval transition game, the advantageous interval transition game processing is terminated. As described above, the ceiling counter is decremented by one each time one game is played in the AT lottery process. Further, the processing on the side of the display control device 81 that has received the ceiling command will be described later in detail.

In the first section display processing, after the advantageous section transition game processing is executed in step S1407, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the eighth display segment N8 in step S1408.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1409 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, for step S1409, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1402 that the advantageous section flag is set, after the display start processing is executed in step S1408 or after the display continuation processing is executed in step S1409, any AT Determine whether the mode flag is set. When it is determined in step S1410 that none of the AT mode flags have been set, and when it is determined in step S1403 that neither the advantageous section flag nor the advantageous section winning game flag is set, in step S1411, A process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1410 that one of the AT mode flags is set, in step S1412, the process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Run. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1411 or step S1412, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1413. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1414, a process for displaying the calculation result of step S1413 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a five-digit number. there is

In step S1414, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1413 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display section 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1414, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1413. In addition, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration in which "0" is always displayed by is also possible. A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42(a). As already explained, the second section display process is a process executed in step S416 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. When the advantageous section flag is set, in step S1602, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous section is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed.

As already explained, in this embodiment, when the AT mode shift lottery is won, the number of precursor games until the AT mode starts is determined, and the value obtained by adding the number of precursor games and the number of advantageous interval games AG is set as AT. Set in the start judgment area. Then, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the AT start determination area, the processing for starting the AT mode is performed. In this case, as described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is incremented by one in the second interval display process. is executed regardless of whether Therefore, for example, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, even if the precursor game is played as a 2-bet game or played in the BB state, the number of advantageous interval games AG is added, and the number of advantageous interval games is increased. By playing a game in which the AG is equal to or greater than the value of the AT start determination area with a bet of a specific prescribed number, the process for starting the AT mode is performed. By doing so, for example, the display control device 81 side performs an effect for the game in which the AT mode is started according to the number of precursor games set based on the winning of the AT mode shift lottery. If so, the AT mode start game on the main control device 101 side and the AT mode on the display control device 81 side are played by playing the game in the predictive game with a bet number that is not the specific prescribed number. A process corresponding to the fact that the game is played with a bet number that is not the specific prescribed number on the display control device 81 side (for example, the AT mode is started in the effect for the number of games). It is possible to preferably avoid it without performing the process of delaying the game.

After executing the process of step S1602, in step S1603, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed.

In the MY update process in step S1603, on the condition that the game result of the current game is not a replay win, the number of inputs (number of bets) is subtracted from the number of payouts, and the subtraction result is is added to update the advantageous section increase/decrease number MY.

After executing MY update processing in step S1603, in step S1604, remaining game number management processing is executed, and in subsequent step S1605, remaining number management processing is executed. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the maximum number of games (1500 games), based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. be. In the number-of-remaining-games management process, for example, it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of games in the advantageous section AG (the number of games completed in the advantageous section) and the AT counter (the number of remaining games in the AT mode) is greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. figure out what In such a situation, a first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. In addition, the remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit increase number (2400) of the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. is. In the remaining payout number management process, for example, the sum of the expected increase number calculated from the AT counter and the average increase number per game in the AT mode and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is greater than the advantageous zone increase/decrease number. Determine whether there are many situations. In such a situation, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for specifying the situation.

In the subsequent step S1606, a process for a specific determination area is executed. The specific determination area process is a process for executing a specific process related to the instruction function using various information stored in each area of the determination information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. FIG.

<Processing for Specific Judgment Area>
In the specific determination area processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 43, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the precursor flag is set. If the portent flag is set, in step S1702, the number of advantageous interval games AG and the AT start determination area in the judgment information storage area 106f are confirmed, and the current number of advantageous interval games AG is the AT start determination area. It is determined whether or not the number of games set in .

Here, in the section display second processing, before the specific determination region processing, the advantageous section game number AG addition processing (step S1602) is executed, and the execution of the processing for starting the AT mode is , during one game, it is executed at a timing before the addition processing of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG. A case where is means that when the game next to the current game is executed with a specific prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state, the process for starting the AT mode will be performed in the next game. do. In other words, when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is the number of games in the AT start determination area in step S1702, it means that the game is the previous game of the game in which the AT mode should be started. In this case, in step S1703, a process of setting a game flag before winning AT is executed. In this embodiment, according to the number of precursor games set based on winning the AT mode shift lottery, the display control device 81 side performs an effect for the game in which the AT mode is started, and the display is performed. In accordance with the effects on the control device 81 side, the main control device 101 side is also configured to perform effects for the game in which the AT mode is started. More specifically, in a game in which the number of advantageous section games AG is the value of the AT start determination area, AT mode transition winning is notified as a rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The game flag before AT winning set in step S1703 is a flag for notifying AT mode transition winning by the rotation effect.

Here, as described above, the second section display process is set to execute each process regardless of whether or not the game is a game with a specific prescribed number of bets. , is executed irrespective of whether or not the game is played with a specific prescribed number of bets. That is, the information regarding the number of games, etc., for executing the process for starting the AT mode as the specific process related to the instruction function stored in the AT start determination area in the determination information storage area 106f is the number of games with a specific prescribed number of bets. , and the CPU 102 can access in a game with a bet number different from the specific prescribed number.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701 or step S1702, or after the process of step S1703 is executed, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, in step S1705, the number of games in the advantageous interval AG and the CZ end determination area in the judgment information storage area 106f are checked, and the current number of games in the advantageous interval AG determines the end of the CZ. It is determined whether or not the number of games set in the area has been reached. If the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games in the CZ end determination area, it is assumed that the conditions for ending the CZ mode are satisfied in the next game, and a pre-CZ end game flag is set at step S1706, and at step S1707. Execute processing to set the CZ end flag. The pre-CZ end game flag is used when notifying that the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode transition lottery as a rotation effect of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Further, as already explained, the CZ end flag is referenced when the AT mode transition lottery table is acquired in the AT lottery process, and on the condition that the CZ end flag is set, the CZ mode flag and the CZ end flag are set. It is cleared, and the ordinary AT mode transition lottery table is acquired.

That is, the CZ end flag set in step S1707 is the number of games in the CZ end determination region in which the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is the number of games, and the CPU 102 selects the game to be subjected to the processing for ending the CZ mode as one of the specific processing related to the instruction function. is a flag that enables to grasp Like the process for starting the AT mode, the process for ending the CZ mode is also executed after determining in the AT lottery process that the number of games in the advantageous section AG is greater than or equal to the number of games in the CZ end determination area. , the processing for ending the CZ mode may be performed. In any case, in a game in which the number of advantageous interval games AG corresponds to the information stored in the determination information storage area 106f and the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, It is only necessary for the CPU 102 to be able to grasp that the processing for CZ termination should be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1704 or step S1705, or if the process of step S1707 has been executed, the process advances to step S1708. In step S1708, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set. If the special zone flag is set, in step S1709, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the special end determination area in the judgment information storage area 106f are checked, and the current number of games in the advantageous zone AG is determined as special. It is determined whether or not the number of games set in the change end determination area is reached. If the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is the number of games in the specialization end determination area, it is determined that the specialization zone end condition is satisfied in the next game, and a specialization end game flag is set in step S1710. As already explained, the specialization end flag is referred to when acquiring the addition lottery table in the AT addition processing, and on the condition that the specialization end flag is set, the specialization zone flag and the specialization end flag are set. It is cleared, and an additional lottery table corresponding to each AT mode is acquired. That is, the specialization end flag set in step S1710 indicates that the number of games AG in the advantageous zone is the number of games in the specialization end determination area, and the specialization zone end processing should be performed as one of the specific processings related to the instruction function. This flag enables the CPU 102 to grasp the game. As with the process for starting the AT mode, the process for ending the specialized zone also determines that the number of games in the advantageous section AG is greater than or equal to the number of games in the specialization end determination area in the process for adding AT. In addition, the configuration may be such that processing for ending the specialized zone is performed. In any case, in a game in which the number of advantageous interval games AG corresponds to the information stored in the determination information storage area 106f and the number of bets is a specific specified number, It is only necessary for the CPU 102 to be able to grasp that processing for ending the specialized zone should be executed. If a negative determination is made in step S1708 or step S1709, or if the process of step S1710 is executed, the process for the specific determination area ends.

In the section display second processing, after the specific determination region processing is executed in step S1606, in step S1607, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section It is determined whether or not the increase/decrease number MY has reached 2400 or more, which is the upper limit increase number. If any of these forced termination conditions are satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games MY are cleared to 0 in step S1608. In the following step S1610, processing is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display. Then, in step S1611, after performing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the second section display processing is terminated.

More specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42(b), in step S1610, initialization of the AT start determination area is executed in step S1651. In this case, 1501 games, which is larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, is set as the initial number of games in the AT start determination area. In subsequent step S1652, initialization processing of the CZ end determination area is executed. In this case, 1501 games, which is larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, is set as the initial number of games in the CZ end determination area, similarly to the AT start determination area. In subsequent step S1653, initialization processing of the specialization end determination area is executed. Also in this case, 1501 games, which is larger than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section, is set as the initial number of games in the specialized end determination area. After that, in step S1654, other initialization processing is executed, and then the initialization processing of this advantageous section information ends. Regarding step S1654, specifically, a process of resetting the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous interval and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous interval to their initial values is executed. For example, if the advantageous section flag, various AT mode flags, etc. are not cleared but set, these flags are cleared. Further, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG, the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous sections MY, the counter for the number of continuous games in the AT mode, etc. are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to zero. That is, in this advantageous interval information initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous interval as an advantageous state using the push order notification. This is a process of clearing the RAM for variables and parameters.

If it is determined in step S1607 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit and the number of increased/decreased numbers in the advantageous section MY has not reached the upper limit increase, the process advances to step S1611, and the AT mode end flag is set. Determine whether or not If the AT mode end flag is set, the process advances to step S1608 to execute advantageous section end processing. If the AT mode end flag is not set, the processing for ending the advantageous section is executed as it is.

That is, in this embodiment, after shifting to the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to the AT mode is performed, and when the transition lottery is won, the number of games in the advantageous section for starting the AT mode is set in the AT start determination area. be. Then, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area, the process for starting the AT mode is executed and the AT mode is entered. As described above, the number of games in the advantageous section AG is incremented by 1 each time one game of the advantageous section is played, regardless of whether the number of bets is a specified number or not. After that, even if the game is played in a 2-bet game or, for example, in the first BB state or the second BB state until the process for starting the AT mode is executed, the AT mode start process is performed. It does not affect the number of games played until the process is executed.

However, the processing for starting the AT mode is executed on the condition that the number of bets is a specific prescribed number. When a game is played with a bet number that is not the specific prescribed number, the execution of the process for starting AT is carried over, delaying the start of the AT mode.

In addition, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the special zone is set over 10 games, and the probability of winning the additional lottery is improved. The CZ mode is set between games, and the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery is improved. The addition lottery and the AT mode transition lottery are executed on the condition that the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, so if you play with a bet number that is not a specific prescribed number may not be able to enjoy the benefits of

That is, basically, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, it is set to be disadvantageous for the player to play the game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number until the AT mode start game.

However, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the effect for starting the AT mode is updated irrespective of whether the bet number is a specific prescribed number. By doing so, for example, complicated effect processing such as correcting the deviation of the effect toward the start of the AT mode according to the number of bets becomes unnecessary. In the following, a process for performing an effect toward the start of the AT mode will be described.

<Rotation effect processing>
First, the processing for notifying that the number of games AG in the advantageous section has reached the number of games set in the AT start determination area on the main controller 101 side will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing rotation effect processing executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101. As shown in FIG. The rotation effect process is a process executed at step S401 in the reel control process (FIG. 22).

In the rotation effect process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the game flag before AT win or the game flag before CZ end is set. As already explained, the pre-AT win game flag is a flag that is set regardless of the number of bets in the game before the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area. The game flag is a flag that is set regardless of the number of bets in the game before the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the CZ end determination area. If none of the flags is set, the rotation effect processing is terminated as it is.

If any flag is set, the process advances to step S1802 to determine whether or not the AT winning game flag is set. If the game flag before AT winning is set, it means that the number of games in the advantageous section AG in the game reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area. In this case, in step S1803, AT winning Execute processing to clear the previous game flag. Then, in step S1804, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set, and if it is set, in step S1805, the first AT notification rotation effect is executed as the current rotation effect. After setting, the rotation effect processing is terminated.

As the rotation effect for notifying the first AT, for example, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating as shown in FIG. As the symbol combination for the first AT, the "BAR" symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped) on a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. is set to resume. Note that the first AT informing rotation effect is a effect that is performed during an invalid period before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes valid after the game is started.

If the 1st AT flag is not set in step S1804, it means that the 2nd AT flag is set. In this case, in step S1806, the 2nd AT notification rotation effect is executed as the current rotation effect. After setting as follows, the rotation effect processing is terminated.

As the rotation effect for informing the second AT, for example, after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate as shown in FIG. As the symbol combination for the second AT, the symbol "White 7" is temporarily stopped (stopped) on a predetermined line (middle line L2), and then, as shown in FIG. A production that restarts the rotation is set. Note that the second AT notification rotation effect is a effect that is performed during an invalid period before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes valid after the game is started.

If the AT winning game flag is not set in step S1802 and the pre-CZ end game flag is set, it means that the CZ mode ends in this game. move on. In step S1807, processing for clearing the pre-CZ end game flag is executed. Then, in step S1808, after setting so as to execute the rotation effect for notifying the deviation as the current rotation effect, the rotation effect processing is terminated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 52(a), after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating, the first AT symbol combination in FIG. Without suspending any of the symbol combinations for 2AT, as shown in FIG. ), an effect is set in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are restarted to rotate. It should be noted that the out-notifying rotation effect is a effect performed during an invalid period after the game is started and before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes valid.

<Production setting processing>
Effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG. The effect setting process is a process started by the CPU 181 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a cycle of 2 msec).

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in the RAM 183 is executed in step S1902. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1901, or after the processing of step S1902 has been executed, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The command at the time of betting is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed, and is a bet command or the like set in step S206 of normal processing. If it is a command at the time of betting, at step S1904, effect setting processing at the time of betting for setting the effect based on the current betting operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1903, or if the process of step S1904 has been executed, it is determined in step S1905 whether or not the newly received command is the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main control unit 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the command corresponding to the lottery result There are a first AT command, a second AT command, an omen command, a CZ command, an add-on command, a push order notification command, a ceiling command, etc., which are set in the process (FIG. 27) and the first section display process (FIG. 40). In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1906.

If a negative determination is made in step S1905, or if the process of step S1906 has been executed, it is determined in step S1907 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S1908, effect setting processing at each stop operation for setting the effect based on the current stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1907, or if the process of step S1908 has been executed, it is determined in step S1909 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stopped command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S417 of the reel control process (FIG. 22). In addition to the commands, the first BB start command, the second BB start command, the first BB end command, and There are a second BB end command, an AT start command, an AT end command, and the like. In the case of these command at the time of all stop, at step S1910, effect setting processing at the time of all stop is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1909, or after the processing of step S1910 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1911, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1911, the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, etc. are controlled so that various effects set in the above-described effect setting processes are executed at corresponding timings. In addition, in step S1911, effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.) are set, and without the main controller 101 Set effects based on signals from sensors (effect switch detection sensors, etc.) connected to , set for error notification, etc.

The effect setting process at start and the effect setting process at all stop will be described below.

<Start effect setting processing>
The effect setting process at the start of step S1906 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is push order win (push order bell win). If the pushing order is won, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not a pushing order notification command has been received. When the pressing order notification command is received, in step S2003, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first to sixth minor winning prizes is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64. Run the settings.

If it is determined in step S2001 that the lottery result of the current game is not winning the second hand, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the lottery result of the current game is winning the specific role. As already explained, the specific combination is a lottery result called a so-called rare combination that is difficult to appear (difficult to win) as a lottery result of each game. A to Cherry C and Watermelon are set as specific roles. As shown in FIG. 30, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by these lottery results, the probability of winning the AT mode transition is set to be higher than other lottery results, and as shown in FIG. In the AT mode additional lottery triggered by these lottery results, the additional lottery is set to be more likely to be won than by other lottery results. If the lottery result of the game this time is that the specific combination is won, a process of setting the specific combination notification effect is executed in step S2005. In the setting processing of the specific role notification effect, setting is executed so that the specific role notification that the lottery result of the current game is one of the above specific roles is performed by the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64. . For example, as shown in FIG. 55(b), three characters of exclamation marks are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 in correspondence with the three stop switches 42 to 44 provided as the special combination notification. A production is set.

After executing the setting process of the special combination notification effect in step S2005, the continuous effect setting process is executed in step S2006. The continuous effect setting process is a process for setting a continuous effect with a specific combination as a trigger. A continuous effect is a series of effects that are performed over a plurality of games, and an advantageous result effect that is advantageous to the player and a disadvantageous result effect that is more disadvantageous to the player than when the advantageous effect is performed. Any one of the plurality of result effects included is the effect to be finally executed. Note that the continuous effect may include a configuration in which the continuous effect ends without the final effect being performed.

<Continuous production setting process>
In the continuous effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 47, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not a portent command has been received as the current start command. The case where the portent command has been received means that the AT mode shift has been won in the AT lottery process on the main controller 101 side. If AT mode transition is won, it is further determined in step S2102 whether or not the first AT command has been received as the command at the start of this time. The first AT command is a command that is output when the AT mode to be shifted this time is determined as the first AT mode in the AT type determination process executed based on the AT mode transition win. If the first AT command has been received, in step S2103, a process of setting the first AT flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. If the first AT command has not been received in step S2102, the second AT command has been received. In this case, the process of setting the second AT flag in the flag storage area 183a is executed in step S2104. .

After executing the process of step S2103 or step S2104, in step S2105, the process of grasping information on the number of precursor games included in the precursor command is executed. As already described, in the present embodiment, when the AT mode transition win is triggered by reaching the ceiling game, the number of premonitory games is set to 1 to 5 games, and the AT mode transition lottery in the normal mode is performed. If the transition wins, the number of premonitory games is set to 5 to 10 games, and if the AT mode transition lottery in CZ mode wins, the number of remaining games in CZ mode is the premonition game number. set.

After the number of precursor games is determined in step S2105, a process of setting the precursor flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed in step S2106, and the number of precursor games ascertained in step S2105 is stored in various ways in step S2107. After inputting to the continuous effect counter provided in the counter area 183b, the continuous effect setting process is terminated. The continuous effect counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of games in which the continuous effect continues (predictive game number), and is subtracted by one each time one game is completed.

If the premonition command is not received even if the special combination is won in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the CZ command is received in step S2108. When the CZ command is not received, the continuous effect setting process is terminated as it is. If the CZ command has been received, in step S2109, a pseudo precursor lottery process is executed. The pseudo portent lottery process is a process of determining by lottery to execute a continuous effect in which a disadvantageous result effect is finally performed. In the pseudo-prediction lottery process, for example, the probability of winning the pseudo-prediction lottery is set differently depending on the type of special combination that triggered the lottery and the setting value, etc., and the lower the appearance rate of the special combination, the more likely the pseudo-prediction lottery is. It may be possible to make it easier to win, or to make it easier to win the pseudo-prediction lottery as the set value set in the process of setting the winning probability is lower. may be applied, or a combination of parameters may be applied.

After the pseudo sign lottery process is executed in step S2109, it is determined whether or not the pseudo sign lottery is won in step S2110. If the pseudo omen lottery is won, in step S2111, the number of games in the CZ mode included in the CZ command is set as the number of games of the continuous effect in the pseudo omen, and the process of inputting the number of games to the continuous effect counter is executed. After that, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

In the start effect setting process, if a negative determination is made in step S2002 or step S2004, or if the process of step S2003 or step S2006 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, it is determined whether or not an add command has been received. When the add-on command is received, setting processing of add-on effect is executed in step S2008. In the setting processing of the additional effect, an additional effect of displaying the added number of games on the auxiliary display section 65 is executed as notification corresponding to the addition of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The mode of the additional effect is not limited to the mode performed in the game in which the additional effect is performed. For example, the number of additional games is notified after a predetermined number of games triggered by the game in which the additional effect is performed. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may include a so-called additional effect mode in which an additional effect is executed when the number of remaining games in the AT mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, one game remaining). .

If a negative determination is made in step S2007, or if the process of step S2008 has been executed, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not a ceiling command has been received as the command at the start of this time. If the ceiling command has been received and it is an advantageous interval transition game, in step S2010 an effect setting process for executing an advantageous interval start effect in accordance with the number of ceiling games on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. . As the advantageous section start effect, as shown in FIGS. 53(a) to 53(c), a cut-in effect in which the face of the main character is displayed close-up is set, and FIG. 53(a) shows a cut-in effect in which the face of the character is displayed, FIG. 53(a) shows a cut-in effect in which the face of the depressed main character is displayed, and FIG. 54(b) shows the face of the main character who is in high spirits A cut-in production is shown. In relation to the number of ceiling games, the cut-in effect of FIG. 53(a) is likely to be selected when the number of ceiling games is relatively large, and the cut-in effect of FIG. 53(c) is selected when the number of ceiling games is relatively small. It is set to be easily selected. In other words, it can be said that the effect at the start of each advantageous section is a suggestive effect suggesting the number of ceiling games of this time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2009, or after the process of step S2010 is performed, a process of determining whether or not the continuous effect counter is greater than 0 is performed in step S2011. If the value is greater than 0, a continuous effect process is executed in step S2012. In the continuous effect processing, the continuous effect counter is updated, and settings are made so that the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 execute the continuous effect corresponding to the value of the continuous effect counter.

<Continuous effect processing>
In the continuous effect in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the main character and the enemy character battle, and if the main character wins the battle, it is reported that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, which is an advantageous result. A production is performed, and a disadvantageous result production is performed as notification that the AT mode transition lottery was not won by the main character being defeated in the battle. More specifically, at the start of the continuous effect, first, as shown in FIG. 51(a), characters such as "Battle Start!" to show the animation. Then, in each game of the continuous production, an attack production showing the main character attacking shown in FIG. 51(b1) and an attacked production showing the enemy character attacking shown in FIG. do. Then, in the final game of the continuous effects, a victory effect in which the main character wins as an advantageous result effect (Fig. 51(c1)) and a defeat effect in which the main character loses as an unfavorable result effect (Fig. 51(c2)). , and the continuous effect is terminated by performing one of the above.

In the continuous effect processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 48, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not a precursor command has been received. If the portent command has been received, the presence or absence of the portent flag is checked in step S2202. If not set, the port flag is set. maintain. In the processing of steps S2201 and S2202, when the AT mode shift lottery is won during the execution of the continuous performance as the already set pseudo sign, the continuous performance as the pseudo sign is rewritten to correspond to the AT mode shift winning. This process is for

When a negative determination is made in step S2201, or after executing the process of step S2202, the process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is executed in step S2203. Then, in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the portent flag is set, and if the portent flag is set, in step S2205, the portent effect table is acquired from the various table storage areas 182a. , a process of acquiring effect data of the current game in the continuous effect is executed from the precursor effect table and the current value of the continuous effect counter. It should be noted that the sign effect table is set such that the smaller the value of the continuous effect counter, the more easily the attack effect of FIG. The attack effect of b1) is set to occur more easily.

If the portent flag is not set in step S2204, the pseudo portent effect table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a in step S2206, and the value of the pseudo portent effect table and the current continuous effect counter are combined. , a process of acquiring the effect data of the current game in the continuous effect is executed. Note that the pseudo precursor effect table is set such that the smaller the value of the continuous effect counter is, the easier it is for the attack effect shown in FIG. 51(b2) to occur. (b2) is set so that the effect of being attacked is likely to occur.

After obtaining the effect data of the current game in step S2205 or step S2206, in step S2207, effect data is set so that the effect based on the obtained effect data is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, or the like. Execute the process that performs

In subsequent step S2208, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is zero. If it is 0, it is determined in step S2209 whether or not the precursor flag is set. If the portent flag is set and the continuous effect of this time corresponds to winning the AT mode shift, the process of clearing the portent flag is executed in step S2210. Then, in step S2211, it is determined whether or not the first AT flag is set, and if it is set, in step S2212 the first AT notification effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64. After performing the effect setting process, the continuous effect process is terminated. If the first AT flag is not set, in step S2213 the effect setting process for executing the second AT notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is performed, and then the continuous effect process is terminated. Further, if it is determined in step S2209 that the precursor flag is not set, then in step S2214 the effect setting process for executing the deviation notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is performed, and then the effect for continuous effect is performed. End the process.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the continuous effect, the first AT notification effect, the second AT notification effect, and the failure notification effect as result effects are set as effects accompanied by rotation effects by the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, the rotation effect for the first AT notification, the rotation effect for the second AT notification, and the rotation effect for the loss notification, which are set in the rotation effect processing described above with reference to FIG. The game in which is performed is the final game of the continuous performance, and when each of these rotation performances is performed, the first AT notification performance, the second AT notification performance, or the disconnection notification performance is generated in the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64.

Specifically, when the AT mode transition lottery is won, each AT notification rotating effect is generated as a rotating effect in a game in which the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area, The number of games set in the AT start determination area corresponds to the number of precursor games, and a game in which the number of precursor games becomes 0 is a game that reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area. Then, on the display control device 81 side, a continuous effect is executed according to the number of the precursor games, and in a game in which the number of the precursor games is 0, each AT notification effect is generated as the above result effect. The game in which the main control device 101 side performs the spinning effect triggered by winning the transfer lottery and the game in which the display control device 81 side performs the result effect are synchronized.

Further, for example, when the AT mode transition lottery is not won with a specific role as a trigger, the main controller 101 side executes the CZ mode transition lottery, and if the CZ mode transition lottery is won, the CZ mode of 10 games is played. is set to Then, if the CZ mode ends without winning the AT mode shift lottery, a rotation effect for notifying loss is generated as a rotation effect in the game when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the CZ end determination area. However, the number of games set in the CZ end determination area corresponds to the number of games in the CZ mode, and the games in which the number of games in the CZ mode becomes 0 reach the number of games set in the CZ end determination area. becomes. Then, on the display control device 81 side, a continuous effect as a pseudo sign corresponding to the number of games in the CZ mode is executed, and in a game in which the number of games of the continuous effect as the pseudo sign is 0, the above result effect is obtained. In order to generate the loss notification effect, the game in which the rotation effect is performed on the main control device 101 side and the game in which the result effect is performed on the display control device 81 side are also synchronized with the non-winning AT mode shift lottery as a trigger. .

Incidentally, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the number of precursor games is set as the number of remaining games in the CZ mode. Therefore, in the case of executing a continuous effect as a pseudo-prediction based on the winning of a specific role that triggered the CZ mode, if the AT mode transition lottery is won during the CZ mode, the continuous effect that has already been executed Without changing the number of remaining games, it is possible to switch to the continuous effect corresponding to the AT mode transition win. More specifically, when an omen command is received during execution of a continuous effect as a pseudo omen with no omen flag set, the omen flag is set at step S2202 in the continuous effect processing. As a result, the continuous effect on the display control device 81 side is switched to one corresponding to the AT mode transition win. When the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games in the AT start determination area on the main controller 101 side, the rotation effect is performed. It is also synchronized with the game in which the display control device 81 side performs a result effect.

However, as already explained, although the counting of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is executed regardless of whether the number of bets is the specific prescribed number or not, the specific processing relating to the instruction function based on the information in the judgment information storage area 106f is executed. Since the execution is performed in a game in which the number of bets is a specific prescribed number, in particular, the execution game for the process for starting the AT mode and the game in which each AT notification effect is performed in the rotating effect and continuous effect More specifically, the game in which the process for starting the AT mode is executed may be the game after the game in which each AT notification effect is performed in the rotation effect or the continuous effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, each AT notification effect executed in the final game of the continuous effect can be continued until the game in which the processing for starting the AT mode is executed. That is, the first AT notification effect and the second AT notification effect set in steps S2212 and S2213 are effects that can be continued over a plurality of games until the process for starting the AT mode is performed as a predetermined end condition. is.

In the start effect setting process, if a negative determination is made in step S2011 or after the process of step S2012 is executed, a bet number corresponding notification process is executed in step S2013, and other start effect setting is performed in step S2014. After the processing is executed, the start-time effect setting processing is terminated. In step S2014, for example, processing for setting an effect suggesting a lottery result corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to inform that the operation has been accepted, etc. is executed. do.

As already explained, the counting of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is executed regardless of whether the number of bets is a specified prescribed number or not, but execution of specific processing relating to the instruction function based on the information in the judgment information storage area 106f is not performed. , in games where the number of bets is a specific prescribed number. The bet number corresponding notification process in step S2013 is a process for executing a notification when the bet number of the game to be started this time is not a specific prescribed number.

<Notification processing corresponding to the number of bets>
In the bet number notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 49, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the game to be started this time is in any of the BB states. If it is not in any BB state, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not the number of bets in the game to be started this time is 3, and if the number of bets is 3 and is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. , the notification process corresponding to the number of bets is terminated. If it is in any BB state in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the number of bets in the game to be started this time is 2. In the case of , the notification process corresponding to the number of bets is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, and the number of bets is not a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, effect setting for executing a limited effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 in step S2304 After executing the process, the bet number notification process is terminated. The limited effect is to inform the player that the number of bets in the current game is not a specific prescribed number according to the game state, but that the execution of processing related to the instruction function such as the AT mode transition lottery and the additional lottery is limited. For example, when executing the limited effect in a situation where the continuous effect is being performed, as shown in FIGS. A band display to which characters such as "HOLD" are added is performed so as to be superimposed on the front side of each of the displayed effects.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop of step S1910 in the effect setting process (FIG. 40) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the effect setting process at all stop is performed when the newly received command is a command at all stop such as a winning result command, an AT start command, an AT end command, a BB start command, a BB end command, or the like. This is a process for setting effects.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not an AT end command has been received. When the AT end command is received, in step S2402, an effect setting process for performing an AT end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the AT end effect displays the number of continuous games in the current AT mode and the number of medals won in the current AT mode on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not any BB start command has been received. If one of the BB start commands is received, an effect setting process for performing a BB start effect corresponding to the BB state to be started in step S2404 by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For the BB start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), an effect is set in which a display (character display such as "BB start") indicating that the BB state is started is performed. Note that the BB start effect differs to such an extent that the player can identify it according to the BB state to start, for example, the background and effect sound are set to be different.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not any BB end command has been received. If one of the BB end commands is received, in step S2406 an effect setting process is executed for performing a BB end effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker 64 according to the BB state to end. For the BB end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(b), an effect is set in which a display (character display such as "BB END") indicating that the BB state is terminated is performed. Note that the BB ending effect differs to the extent that the player can identify it according to the BB state to end, and is set so that, for example, backgrounds and sound effects are different.

As already explained, the BB state is set to be executed as a 3-bet game, and the specific prescribed number in the BB state is a 2-bet game. execution is restricted. Therefore, in each game during the BB state, the restricted effect is executed. That is, in the game in which the BB end effect is performed, the limit effect is executed (see FIG. 56(b)). Also, the 1st BB win can occur in a 3-bet game, and the 2nd BB win can occur in a 2-bet game. While the execution is not restricted and the restricted effect is not performed, in the game in which the BB start effect corresponding to the second BB state is performed, the execution of the processing related to the instruction function is restricted and the restricted effect is performed (Fig. 56 ( a) shows the second BB start effect).

If a negative determination is made in step S2405, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not an AT start command has been received. When the AT start command is received, in step S2408, the AT notification effect being executed is ended, and the effect setting process for performing the AT start effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. For the AT start effect, for example, an effect is set in which a display indicating that the AT mode is started (character display such as "AT start") is performed. It should be noted that the AT start effect differs to such an extent that the player can identify it according to the type of AT mode to be started. For example, the background and effect sound are set differently.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game in which the processing for starting the AT mode is executed may be a game after the game in which each AT notification effect is performed in the rotation effect or the continuous effect, but the game has already been executed. The AT notification effect that is being performed is terminated based on the reception of the AT start command after the processing for starting the AT mode is performed as a predetermined termination condition. By doing so, if the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area, the execution of the process for starting the AT mode is limited, such as a 2-bet game. Even in such a case, if the right to shift to the AT mode is extinguished before the AT mode start process is performed while the AT notification effect is performed in the game. It is possible to suitably avoid the event that a person misunderstands.

After the processing of step S2402, step S2404, step S2406 or step S2408 is executed, another effect setting process at the time of all stop is executed at step S2409, and then the effect setting process at the time of all stop ends. In step S2409, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 lights up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, control is performed so that sound effects corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination are emitted from the speaker 64, and control is performed during replay. The speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the automatic betting.

<Game flow>
Using the timing chart of FIG. 57, a series of flows from winning the AT mode transition lottery to starting the AT mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 57(a), at the timing of ta1 in the advantageous section, for example, the AT mode shift lottery is executed with a special combination as a trigger, and the AT mode shift lottery is won. In this case, the number of predictive games is set, and the number of games obtained by adding the number of predictive games to the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is set in the AT start determination area. As already explained, when the number of games AG in the advantageous interval reaches the number of games (ta4) set in the AT start determination area, the processing for starting the AT mode is performed. Then, it is set at ta1 that continuous effects are performed in the game from ta1 to ta4.

In this case, for example, even if the timing from ta2 to ta3 up to the timing of ta4 is completed in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, the game in which the processing for starting the AT mode is performed will not be affected. . Then, at ta4, as an AT winning notification, a rotation effect by each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and each AT notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 etc. are executed, and at ta4, a process for starting AT mode is executed. Then, the display mode shifts from the normal mode to the AT mode.

Then, as described above, the continuous effect set at the timing of ta1 does not need to be readjusted depending on whether or not there is a game in which the execution of the process related to the instruction function such as a 2-bet game is restricted, and the process configuration for performing the effect is eliminated. It is possible to achieve overwhelming simplification of

FIG. 57(b) shows a case where the number of games set in the AT start determination area has been completed in a game such as a 2-bet game in which execution of processing related to the instruction function is restricted.

That is, at the timing of tb1, which is in the advantageous section, the AT mode transition lottery is executed with the winning of a special role as a trigger, and if the AT mode transition lottery is won, the number of predictive games is set as in the case of ta1 above. At the same time, a game for executing AT mode start processing is set in the AT start determination area (tb3). Then, it is set at tb1 that continuous effects are performed in the game from tb1 to tb3.

At tb2 before reaching tb3, if the game is switched to a 2-bet game, and the games up to tb4 after tb3, including the game at tb3, are completed in the 2-bet game, the above will be performed. Execution of the set AT mode start processing is carried over from tb3 to tb4. Then, in the game at tb4, processing for starting the AT mode is executed, and the AT mode is started. Even in this case, at tb3, as the AT win notification, the rotation effects by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the AT notification effects by the auxiliary display section 65 and the like are executed. In other words, even if the game set in the AT start determination area is completed in a 2-bet game or the like, it does not affect the number of executed games for AT win notification. Then, the AT win notification executed at tb3 is continued until the process for starting the AT mode is executed at tb4.

<Advantage of the game during continuous production>
FIG. 58 is a timing chart for explaining the difference in the degree of advantage between the 3-bet game and the 2-bet game in which continuous effects are executed.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), it is assumed that an AT mode transition lottery is performed with a specific role as a trigger at the timing of ta11 in the advantageous section, and the player wins the AT mode transition lottery. In this case, the number of precursor games is set in the same manner as described above, and the number of games obtained by adding the number of precursor games to the current number of games in the advantageous interval AG is set in the AT start determination area (ta14).

When the AT mode transition lottery is won, the sign flag is set, and in the lottery result handling process, the AT mode additional lottery is performed even before the AT mode transition. In this embodiment, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, a special zone is set in which the probability of addition is high over 10 games (from ta11 to ta15).

Then, as described above, even if the games from ta12 to ta13, which are the games before reaching the number of games set in the AT start determination area, are completed in the 2-bet game, the process for starting the AT mode is not performed. Although the number of games to be played is not affected, since the AT mode transition lottery is not executed in the games from ta12 to ta13, the benefits of the special zone can be enjoyed for the games from ta12 to ta13. will not be able to In other words, since the number of medals lost per game is smaller in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, 2 bets are required to complete the game with fewer medals until the AT mode starts. Although the game is more preferable for the player, the benefit of the special zone cannot be enjoyed by playing in the 2-bet game, so the number of medals lost until the start of the AT mode and the benefit of the special zone A player can play a game after selecting one of them. By doing so, the options for the game are increased, and the interest in the game is improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of games in the special zone is more than the average number of reductions in medals used from the case of playing a 3-bet game when a 2-bet game is played until the start of the AT mode. The number of expected medals calculated from the number of AT mode additional games that can be expected when used is set to be larger. Basically, it is set so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the 3-bet game.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), at the timing of tb11 in the advantageous section, an AT mode transition lottery is performed with a special role as a trigger, and even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, the CZ mode transition lottery is won. Then, the CZ mode is set in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is high over 10 games (from tb11 to tb15).

Then, as described above, after winning the specific role, if the games from tb11 to tb15 set in the CZ mode, for example, the games from tb12 to tb13 are completed in the 2-bet game, Since the AT mode shift lottery is not executed in the games from tb12 to tb13, the benefits of the CZ mode cannot be enjoyed for the games from tb12 to tb13.

When the CZ mode is set at tb11, continuous effects are executed over the number of games from tb11 to tb14 before the end of the CZ mode.

Here, in the continuous effect, although it is set so that either a victory effect as an advantageous effect effect or a defeat effect as an unfavorable result effect is executed in the final game, each game up to the final game is executed. In the continuous performance triggered by winning the AT mode transition lottery, both the attack performance and the attacked performance can occur, and the continuous performance triggered by not winning the AT mode transition lottery. However, both an attack effect and an attacked effect can occur. Therefore, it is set so that it is difficult or impossible to distinguish which of the advantageous result effect and the disadvantageous result effect is executed and ended in the continuous effect.

That is, basically, it is not possible to determine whether or not the AT mode transition lottery executed when the specific combination is won at tb11 is won until the final game of the continuous effect. Also, whether or not the AT mode transition lottery executed when the specific combination is won at ta11 is won can basically be determined until the final game of the continuous effect. In other words, each game in which the continuous effect is started from ta11 and tb11 corresponds to the special zone or the CZ mode until ta14 and tb14 when the continuous effect ends. I can't tell if it is. By doing so, not only when the continuous performance is started at ta11, but also when the continuous performance is started at tb11, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is limited. is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the 3-bet game.

Here, in this embodiment, when the AT mode transition lottery is won with a specific role as a trigger, continuous production is executed, while the game results other than the specific role (normal roles such as normal reply A to normal reply C) When the AT mode shift lottery is won as a trigger, or when the number of ceiling games is reached and the shift to the AT mode is confirmed, the continuous performance is not executed. In other words, even if the number of games for which the process for starting the AT mode is to be executed is set in the AT start determination area, an effect for the game for executing the process for starting the AT mode may be performed. It may or may not be done. By doing so, it is possible to make the player face each game with a sense of anticipation even in a situation where continuous effects are not performed. Even if the continuous effect is not performed, when the number of games set in the AT start determination area is reached, the AT notification rotating effect is executed as the rotating effect of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the start of the game. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that astounds the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the AT mode shift lottery is not won and the game is shifted to the CZ mode, the continuous performance is not executed if the pseudo sign performance lottery is not won. In other words, even in the CZ mode, the continuous effect may not be performed. By doing so, even if the continuous performance is not started after winning the specific combination, it is possible to leave the hope of the CZ mode and to act as a deterrent to playing the 2-bet game. . Even if the continuous effect is not performed, when the number of games set in the CZ end determination area is reached, at the start of the game, the spin effect for notifying the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed as the spin effect. Therefore, along with the AT notification rotation effect that is not accompanied by the above-described continuous effect, it is possible to create an effect that astonishes the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a strong thrilling feeling in each game in a situation where continuous effects are not performed.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the shift to the AT mode is confirmed by winning an AT mode shift lottery, etc., the number of games obtained by adding the number of premonitory games to the current number of games in the advantageous section AG is set in the AT start determination area, and the number of games in the advantageous section AG is set. is the number of games set in the AT start determination area, the process for starting the AT mode is performed. In this case, the process for starting the AT mode can be executed in a game with a specific prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state, and can be executed in a game with a different bet number from the specific prescribed number. , If the game in which the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games set in the AT start determination area is a game with a bet number different from the specific prescribed number, then the game with the specific prescribed number of bets is played. The AT mode start processing is executed when the AT mode is started. In other words, after the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area, the execution of the process for starting the AT mode is put on hold until the number of bet games with the specific prescribed number is performed. . By doing so, the number of games for which the specific process relating to the instruction function is to be executed is set in the determination information storage area 106f. While simplifying the processing configuration for grasping the execution game of the specific processing, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the right to shift to AT mode after playing a game with a different number of bets than the specified prescribed number It is possible to suitably avoid the phenomenon that the player misunderstands that the has disappeared. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable while simplifying the processing configuration for progressing the game.

After the initialization process of the advantageous interval information, 1501, which is the number of games larger than the upper limit number of games of the advantageous interval, is input as the initial number of games to the AT start determination area. By doing so, in the configuration using the determination information storage area 106f, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the process for starting the AT mode is executed without winning the AT mode transition. .

A plurality of types of specific processes are provided as specific processes related to the instruction function, and an AT start determination area, a CZ end determination area, and a specialized end determination area are provided in the determination information storage area 106f according to the content of each specific process. rice field. In other words, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG becomes the number of games set in the AT start determination area, AT mode start processing is performed as one process of the specific processing, and the number of games set in the CZ end determination area If it becomes, the process for ending the CZ mode is performed as one process of the specific process, and if the number of games set in the special end determination area is reached, the special zone ends as one process of the specific process. It is configured to perform processing for By doing so, it is possible to centrally manage whether or not to execute a plurality of specific processes and the execution timing by the determination information storage area 106f and the number of advantageous interval games AG, thereby simplifying the processing configuration. Specifically, for example, in the advantageous section information initialization process, instead of deleting execution information corresponding to each specific process, the determination information storage area 106f itself is initialized (step S1651 to step S1651). S1653), and significant simplification of the process can be expected.

Each area in the determination information storage area 106f can be accessed by the CPU 102 not only in a game with a specific prescribed number of bets according to the gaming state, but also in a game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number. By doing so, it is possible for the CPU 102 to recognize that the specific process related to the instruction function is to be executed even in a game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number. Therefore, even if the specific process is not executed when the game becomes a game in which the specific process should be executed, it is possible to notify that the game has become a game in which the specific process should be executed. Further, by storing information (for example, CZ end flag, specialized end flag, etc.) indicating that the game has already become a game to execute the specific process, the game with the specific prescribed number of bets can be played next. When it is done, it is not necessary to check the corresponding judgment information storage area 106f again, so it is possible to simplify the processing.

For example, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG becomes the number of games set in the AT start determination area, is the game a game with a specific prescribed number of bets or a game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number? Regardless, that is, regardless of whether or not AT mode start processing is performed in the game, the main controller 101 side performs an AT notification rotation effect by the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game. On the display control device 81 side, the AT notification effect is executed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like in the game. In other words, for example, when a game is played with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number, the bet number other than the specific prescribed number is not performed, such as delaying the game in which the AT notification rotation effect or the AT notification effect is executed. Regardless of the presence or absence of the execution of the game by , it is configured to execute these AT notification rotation effect and AT notification effect in the game set in the AT start determination area. By doing so, a great simplification of the processing is realized.

Moreover, on the display control device 81 side, based on the sign command output from the main control device 101 side when the AT mode transition lottery is won, the game for executing the AT notification effect is set in the continuous effect counter, and after that, is configured to execute an AT notification effect by setting a continuous effect counter updated every time one game is completed to 0. That is, the display control device 81 side does not even judge whether or not a game has been executed with a bet number other than a specific prescribed number when executing a continuous effect, thereby realizing a significant simplification of the processing. .

When the result of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is winning, continuous performance is executed according to the number of precursor games, and when the result of the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not winning, the lottery for shifting to the CZ mode is won. Under this condition, a continuous effect using the pseudo precursor effect table is executed. In other words, regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not, the continuous effect can be started, and the game until the process for starting the AT mode is performed is suppressed by the number of bets other than the specific prescribed number. can be expected.

However, if the AT notification effect is performed as a result effect in the continuous effect, the AT start command will not be received if the game is a game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number. It is configured to continue until the processing for starting the AT mode is executed in the game in which the command is received, that is, in the game with the specific prescribed number of bets. By doing so, the player misunderstands that the right to shift to the AT mode has been extinguished through the fact that the AT mode does not start despite the AT notification effect being performed. It is possible to avoid the event that

The number of medals (net increase) that can be expected per game is larger in games with bet numbers other than the specific prescribed number than in games with bet numbers of the specific prescribed number. More specifically, if internal or non-internal states other than the BB state are consumed in a 3-bet game, a reduction of approximately 1.77 medals can be expected per game, and these internal or non-internal states can be reduced by 2. If you spend it in a bet game, you can expect a decrease of about 0.64 medals per game, so you should spend it in a 2-bet game rather than in a 3-bet game for internal or non-internal states. In the case, the number of net additions is larger. In addition, since a decrease (increase) of about 0.00 tokens can be expected per game in the BB state, the number of net additions is greater than when the internal state and non-internal state are digested in a 3-bet game. With such a configuration, for example, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the game can be completed in a 2-bet game or in a BB state until the process for starting the AT mode is performed. By doing so, it is possible to wait for the start of the AT mode while suppressing medal loss until the AT mode starts. There are merits for the player to play in the BB state or to play in the BB state. Therefore, if the specific process should be executed in a game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number, there is significance in waiting for execution of the specific process until the game with the specific prescribed number of bets. .

As described above, in the case where the AT mode transition lottery is not won, it is possible to shift to the CZ mode. It is configured not to be executed in a game with a bet number other than a specific prescribed number. In other words, even if the AT mode transition lottery is not won, unless the game is completed with a specific prescribed number of bets, the AT mode transition lottery cannot be received, and the benefits of the CZ mode cannot be enjoyed. By doing so, the game is completed with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number at least from the occurrence of the opportunity to set the number of games in the AT start determination area to the game in which the specific process can be performed. It is possible to suppress

In addition, if the AT mode shift lottery is won, it is possible to shift to the specialized zone. It is configured not to be executed in a game with a bet number other than the number. In other words, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, unless the game is completed with a specific prescribed number of bets, the AT mode additional lottery cannot be received, so the benefits of the specialized zone cannot be enjoyed. . By doing so, the game is completed with the number of bets other than the specific prescribed number at least from the moment when the opportunity for setting the number of games in the AT start determination area occurs to the game in which the specific processing can be performed. can be suppressed.

In particular, the lottery result of the game becomes a specific role as a so-called rare role for these CZ modes and specialized zones, and it is made easy to shift when an AT mode transition lottery based on such a specific role is performed. In other words, it is easier to win an AT mode transition lottery triggered by a specific role than an AT mode transition lottery triggered by a result other than a specific role. Become. Also, even if the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the specific role is not won, in the CZ mode transition lottery that is triggered by the non-winning, it is better to trigger the specific role than the result other than the specific role. It is easier to win than to play, and it is easy to shift to CZ mode with a special role as a trigger. Then, when it becomes a specific role for which the number of games can be set in the AT start determination area, at least the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area. Playing a game with a specific prescribed number of bets for which a mode transition lottery or a high-probability extra lottery is performed is more advantageous to the player than playing with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number. Therefore, after the number of games is set in the AT start determination area, the inconvenience caused by playing with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number In this case, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the end game is delayed when the progress is not made, and the inconvenience that the game state such as RT cannot be changed because the pressing order cannot be notified.

When the AT mode shift lottery is not won, and the shift to the CZ mode is triggered, the continuous performance based on the pseudo portent performance table is performed, and the AT mode shift is performed during the continuous performance based on the pseudo portent performance table. When the lottery is won, only the content of the continuous performance is changed without changing the final game of the continuous performance being executed (the game in which the result performance is performed). More specifically, the continuous effect based on the pseudo-predictive effect table is set to be executed over the number of continuous games in the CZ mode. The number of games remaining in the CZ mode is set as the number of precursor games, and the number of games in the AT start determination area is set. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately suppress the phenomenon that the AT mode transition lottery is determined to be appropriate or not due to the difference in the number of games in the continuous effect, and the situation in which the continuous effect is being performed is controlled by a specific rule. It is possible to suitably suppress the game from being played with a bet number other than the number.

In this case, on the display control device 81 side, before the number of games is set in the AT start determination area, the continuous effect is started when the number of games is set in the AT start determination area. . With such a configuration, when using the configuration for setting the number of games for which the specific process is to be executed in the determination information storage area 106f, the effect setting itself for the number of games to be executed is This configuration is performed before the number of games to be executed is set, and local increases in the processing load when setting the number of games to be executed can be suppressed.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, as information to be set in the judgment information storage area 106f, information on the number of ceiling games is also set. FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing processing for an advantageous section transition game in this embodiment.

In step S2501, processing for obtaining a ceiling table is executed, and in step S2502, ceiling game number lottery processing is executed. The processes of steps S2501 and S2502 are the same as the processes of steps S1501 and S1502 described above.

In step S2503, a process of setting information on the number of ceiling games selected in step S2502 in the ceiling determination area provided in the determination information storage area 106f is executed. For example, when 999 games are selected as the number of ceiling games, 999 games are input to the ceiling determination area. That is, the process of step S2503 is one process of setting the number of games in the advantageous section in which the specific process relating to the instruction function is to be executed. By the way, the initial setting value set in the ceiling determination area after the initialization processing of the RAM 106 and the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous interval is 1501, which is the number of games larger than the upper limit number of games of the advantageous interval. The initial set value may be 999 games, which is the upper limit number of games in the ceiling game lottery process.

Then, in step S2504, a process of setting a ceiling command including information on the number of ceiling games to be output to the display control device 81 is executed, and then this advantageous section transition game process is terminated.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the AT lottery process is executed when the number of bets is a specified prescribed number according to the gaming state in the lottery result correspondence process in a situation where the transition to the AT mode during the advantageous section is not confirmed. This is the process to be performed. In the present embodiment, the mode of processing for determining whether or not the ceiling number of games has been reached is different from that in the first embodiment.

That is, in step S2601, a process of grasping the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is executed. In subsequent step S2602, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG is equal to or greater than the number of games set in the ceiling determination area. If the number of games is equal to or greater than the number of games set in the ceiling determination area, the process advances to step S2611 without going through the AT mode transition lottery process of steps S2603 to S2610, and executes the AT mode transition winning process. . On the other hand, if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is less than the number of games set in the ceiling determination area, the process advances to step S2603 to execute AT mode shift lottery processing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the ceiling determination area in the determination information storage area 106f, the ceiling is reached and the mode is shifted to the AT mode. As a result, in a game with a specific prescribed number of bets, processing related to the instruction function, such as processing for notification of pressing order and AT mode transition lottery, is permitted, while in games with a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number, these instruction functions are allowed. Although it is assumed that the execution of the processing related to is restricted, regardless of whether the number of bets is a specific prescribed number or not, it is configured to shift to the AT mode according to the number of advantageous section games AG that progresses. If the goal is to reach the target, it is possible to realize a game property such as completing each game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number on the side with the larger net increase number. However, even when the ceiling is reached, at least in order to start the AT mode, it is necessary to play with a specific prescribed number of bets. To realize a novel playability up to the above-mentioned ceiling within a range not contrary to the significance of providing a game with a specific prescribed number of bets that can be executed and a game with a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number that cannot be executed. becomes possible.

In the advantageous interval transition game processing, based on the number of games corresponding to the ceiling game number being set in the ceiling determination area, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like displays an advantageous interval start effect corresponding to the ceiling game number (step S2009, Step S2010, FIG. 53) is executed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest the number of games set in the ceiling judgment area in the judgment information storage area 106f, and the contents of the judgment information storage area 106f (ceiling game number) can be predicted based on the suggestion. It is possible to make a game to play.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the number of games AG in the advantageous section, information stored in the determination information storage area 106f, and information set in the various flag storage area 106d are used to execute specific processing related to the instruction function. differ in content. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing AT lottery processing in this embodiment.

In the AT lottery process in the present embodiment, information on the number of games for which the process for starting the AT mode is executed, information on the number of games for which the process for ending the CZ mode is executed, and games for which the process for ending the special zone is executed. The difference from the first and second embodiments is that the information about the number is input to the specific determination area in the determination information storage area 106f.

That is, the processing of steps S2701 to S2711 is the same as the processing of steps S801 to S811, and when the AT mode transition lottery is won after executing the AT mode transition lottery according to the game result and the display mode , set the AT mode type. In the AT start game setting process in step S2712, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 62, in steps S2807 and S2810, information on the number of games to be executed for starting the AT mode is input to the determination information storage area 106f. Then, it is input to the specific determination area instead of the AT start determination area. In the AT start game setting process, other processes than steps S2807 and S2810 are the same as the corresponding processes in the first and second embodiments.

In the AT lottery process, after the AT start game setting process is executed in step S2712, the process for clearing the CZ mode flag is executed in steps S2713 and S2714. After that, in step S2715, after executing the process of setting the special zone flag, the AT lottery process ends. That is, in this embodiment, the process of inputting the information about the number of games for which the process for ending the special zone is to be executed into the determination information storage area 106f is omitted.

If it is determined in step S2710 that the AT mode transition lottery is not won, processes such as CZ mode transition lottery are performed in steps S2716 to S2718. If the transition to the CZ mode is to be made (step S2718: YES), the number of games in the advantageous zone AG is grasped in step S2719, and then in step S2720, information on the number of games for which the process for ending the CZ mode is to be executed is displayed as the current number of games. A process of inputting the number of games obtained by adding 10 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG to the specific determination area is executed. Then, the CZ mode flag is set in step S2721, the CZ command is set in step S2722, and then the AT lottery process ends.

In the AT start game determination process of the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 63, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG is equal to or greater than the number of games in the specific determination area rather than the AT start determination area. is determined, it is determined whether or not the game should execute the process for starting the AT mode. Other processes in the AT start game determination process are the same as those in the first and second embodiments.

In the specific determination area processing in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 64, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is the number of games set in the specific determination area. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, it is determined in step S3002 whether or not an omen flag is set, and if it is set, in step S3003 a process of setting a pre-AT win game flag is executed. .

If it is determined in step S3002 that the precursor flag has not been set, or if the process of step S3003 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode flag is set, and if it is set, the pre-CZ end game flag is set in step S3005, and the CZ end flag is set in step S3006. to run. If it is determined in step S3004 that the CZ mode flag is not set, or if the process of step S3006 is executed, it is determined in step S3007 whether or not the special zone flag is set. If the specialization zone flag is set, processing for setting the specialization end flag is executed in step S3008. If a negative determination is made in step S3001 or step S3007, or if the process of step S3008 has been executed, the process for the specific determination area ends.

In the rotation effect processing in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 65, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games set in the specific determination area. If the affirmative determination is made in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the game flag before winning AT is set in step S3102. Execute the process to perform On the other hand, even if the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games set in the specific determination area, if the pre-AT win game flag is not set and the pre-CZ end game flag is set, step S3107. ˜At step S3108, a process for performing a rotation effect for notification of deviation is executed. The processing of steps S3102 to S3108 is the same as the processing of steps S1802 to S1808 described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, information on the number of games for which the specific process relating to the instruction function is to be executed is input to the specific determination area, and the game in which the number of advantageous interval games AG is input to the specific determination area. When the number is reached, the various information set in the various flag storage area 106d is used to determine which specific process should be executed, and then the corresponding specific process (process for starting AT mode, CZ mode end processing, special zone end processing). More specifically, when the number of games entered in the specific determination area is reached while the portent flag is set, processing for starting the AT mode is executed, and when the CZ mode flag is set, the specified determination area is entered. When the number of games reaches the specified number, the processing for ending the CZ mode is executed, and when the number of games input to the specific judgment area reaches the number of games in which the special zone flag is set, the processing for ending the special zone is executed. be. By doing so, it is possible to achieve overwhelming simplification of the configuration compared to a configuration in which a plurality of types of game numbers for specific determination are set in the determination information storage area 106f.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even in the effect processing (rotating effect processing) for performing the effect corresponding to the contents of the specific processing related to the instruction function, the number of advantageous interval games AG is equal to the number of games input to the specific determination area. In this case, after determining which specific process should be executed using various information set in the various flag storage areas 106d, the corresponding effect process (process for performing each AT notification rotation effect , processing for performing rotation production for outage notification). More specifically, when the number of games entered in the specific determination area in a situation where the game flag before winning AT is set, a process for performing each AT notification rotation effect is executed, and the game flag before CZ end is set. When the number of games entered in the specific determination area is reached in the set state, a process for performing a rotation effect for informing the loss is executed. In this way, by using the number of games input to the specific determination area, not only specific processing related to the instruction function is performed, but also other processing such as effects to be linked with the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. , the processing configuration for performing the effect can be made overwhelmingly simple.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG becomes the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f, if the number of bets for that game is not the specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, , the execution of the specific process relating to the instruction function is carried over to the game with the specific prescribed number of bets, but in the present embodiment, it is not carried over. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing lottery result handling processing in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the second process for the specific determination area is executed in step S3201. The second process for the specific determination area determines whether or not to execute the process for starting the AT mode when the number of games AG in the advantageous interval reaches the number of games set in the AT start determination area. This is a process of determining according to the number. After executing the second process for the specific determination area, in steps S3202 to S3213, the process for the advantageous section, the process for the AT mode, and the process for notifying the pressing order are executed. The processing of steps S3202 to S3213 is the same as the processing of steps S601 to S612.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 67, the second process for the specific determination area first determines whether or not the precursor flag is set in step S3301. If the precursor flag is not set, the second process for the specific determination region is terminated. If the portent flag is set, it is determined in step S3302 whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous section of the current game is the number of games set in the AT start determination area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, it is determined in step S3303 whether or not any BB state flag is set, and if not set, in step S3304 whether the bet number is 3 determine whether Also, if any BB status flag is set, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S3305.

That is, the process of steps S3303 to S3305 is a process of determining whether or not the number of bets in the game started this time is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3304 or step S3305, the second processing for the specific determination area is terminated as it is, assuming that the number of bets in the game started this time is the specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3304 or step S3305, this means that the number of bets for the game started this time is not the specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, and in this case, the process proceeds to step S3306.

In step S3306, processing for clearing the precursor flag is executed. Then, in step S3307, processing for clearing the first AT flag and the second AT flag is executed. In the subsequent step S3308, a process of clearing the game flag before winning AT is executed. Then, in step S3309, processing for setting a game flag before CZ end is executed.

That is, by clearing the precursor flag, the first AT flag, and the second AT flag in steps S3306 and S3307, the process for starting the AT mode will not be executed in the subsequent AT start game determination process. In the first place, since the portent flag is cleared, the information of winning the AT mode transition lottery that triggered the setting of the portent flag, etc., that is, the AT mode transition to the AT mode obtained based on the AT mode transition lottery. rights will be extinguished. In addition, since the game flag before winning AT is also cleared and the game flag before CZ end is set, in the rotation effect processing of the game this time, the processing for executing each AT notification rotation effect is not performed. , the process for executing the rotation effect for notification of the deviation is performed.

After executing the process of step S3309, the process of setting the avoidance command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed in step S3310, and then the second process for the specific determination region ends. Although the AT mode transition lottery has been won, the avoidance command is based on the fact that the game to be executed for AT mode start processing is played with a bet number that is not a specific prescribed number. This is a command for causing the display control device 81 to recognize that execution of processing has been avoided.

FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing continuous effect processing in this embodiment. As already explained, the continuous effect processing is a process executed as one process of the start time effect setting processing on the display control device 81 side, and more specifically, it is executed when the continuous effect counter is greater than zero. processing.

In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the above-described avoidance command has been received as the current start command. If an avoidance command has been received, then in step S3402 processing for clearing the precursor flag and each AT flag is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, or after executing the process of step S3402, in steps S3403 to S3416, the effect setting process for continuous effect according to the value of the continuous effect counter is executed.

As described above, when the avoidance command is received, the precursor flag and each AT flag are cleared. or second AT notification effect) is not executed, and the defeat effect (loss notification effect) is executed.

The game flow in this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

In the game at t21, which is an advantageous section, a specific role is won, and if the AT mode transition lottery based on the specific role is won, the number of precursor games is set, and an AT mode start is displayed in the AT start determination area. The game to be processed is set as the game at t23.

From the game at t22 before t23 to the game at t24 after t23, the game was played with a bet number that is not a specific prescribed number according to the game state, such as playing in one of the BB states. In this case, the process for starting the AT mode is not executed in the game at t23, and the process for starting the AT mode is not executed in the game at t24 either. In other words, the right to shift to the AT mode acquired at t21 is lost based on the fact that the game at t23 is played with a bet number that is not the specific prescribed number.

In the continuous effect started at t21, the effect based on the precursor effect table is performed until the game preceding the game at t23, but the effect is based on the pseudo-predictive effect table from the precursor effect table in the game at t23. , and the result effect in the continuous effect is not the victory effect but the defeat effect. It should be noted that the spinning effect of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game at t23 is also changed from the AT informing spinning effect to the informing spinning effect.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the AT mode transition lottery is won and the number of games for which the process for starting the AT mode is to be executed is set in the AT start determination area, a specified prescribed number of games for which the process for starting the AT mode is to be executed is set. If you use a bet number other than the above, not only will the AT mode start processing not be performed in the game, but even if you play the subsequent games with a specific prescribed number of bets, the AT mode will be played again. The configuration is such that the process for starting the AT mode is not performed unless the transfer lottery is won. By doing so, it is possible to specify the game until the process for starting the AT mode is executed because the net increase in the number of bets is larger (the number of losses is smaller) if the bet number other than the specific prescribed number is used. It is possible to preferably prevent the number of bets other than the prescribed number from being consumed.

When a game is played with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number, the process for starting the AT mode is not performed as described above. However, the information about the number of games set in the AT start determination area is maintained as it is. In other words, the management (setting, deletion, etc.) of the information in the AT start determination area is left to the game with the specific prescribed number of bets, and the execution or non-execution of various processes related to the instruction function can be managed with the specific prescribed number. It is possible to prevent the execution of the process for starting the AT mode while not contradicting the meaning. Even with the above configuration, since the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is not subtracted in one advantageous interval, after the number of games in the advantageous interval AG exceeds the number of games set in the AT start determination area, Again, the number of games in the advantageous section AG does not become the number of games set in the AT start determination area, and the processing for starting the AT mode is not performed.

As described above, the 2-bet game in the internal state or the non-internal state corresponds to a game with a bet number other than the specified stipulated number, and each game in the 1BB state and the 2nd BB state also has a bet number other than the specified stipulated number. However, the first BB state and the second BB state can be continued over a plurality of games, and once the state is shifted to the first BB state or the second BB state, the first BB state or the second BB state can be played. The first BB state and the second BB state can continue until the conditions for terminating the second BB state are satisfied. In other words, if the transition to the first BB state or the second BB state occurs near the number of games for which the process for starting the AT mode should be executed, the AT mode start process will inevitably occur during the first BB state or the second BB state. There is a possibility that the number of games for which the process of 1 should be executed is reached. Therefore, in particular, immediately before the process for starting the AT mode, attention is urged so as not to cause a transition to the first BB state or the second BB state, and it is possible to face the game with a sense of tension.

Note that the end conditions for the first BB state and the second BB state may be different. The number of payouts may be 150, which is more than 15 (150 is set in step S511). In this case, the first BB state ends after about two games (13 payouts + 13 payouts = 26 payouts), while the second BB state ends after about 12 games (13 payouts x 12 = 156 payouts). Become. That is, for example, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, if the state is shifted to the 1 BB state, if the game for which the process for starting the AT mode is to be performed is not scheduled within 2 games, the shifted 1 BB Although the number of games for AT mode start processing is reached after the end of the state, if the state is shifted to the second BB state, the number of games for AT mode start processing is reached during the second BB state ( number of precursor games≦10 games). In this way, depending on the BB state to be shifted, whether or not the number of games for which the processing for starting the AT mode should be executed during the BB state is reached differs, thereby preventing the BB state from winning. It is also possible to make use of the difference in tension depending on the type to improve the interest of the game.

Thus, in the configuration in which the ending conditions are different between the first BB and the second BB, while the first BB can win in the 3-bet game, it cannot win in the 2-bet game, and the second BB can win in the 2-bet game. While it is possible to win in the game, it is configured not to win in the 3-bet game, but by changing this configuration, it is possible to win in the 3-bet game in both the first BB and second BB By adopting a possible configuration, depending on which BB is won, the tension of the game after winning the AT mode transition is greatly different, and in the situation where the second BB is won, the AT mode transition is won. If the player wins the first BB, the feeling of tension is increased, and if the AT mode transition is won in the situation where the first BB is won, the feeling of tension is lowered, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which end conditions are different between the 1st BB and the 2nd BB, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the winning can be avoided. In this case, after winning the AT mode transition, if the 1 BB is won, depending on the relationship between the winning game and the game for which the process for starting the AT mode should be performed, the AT mode start process may be performed. Although there is a possibility that processing will be performed, if the 2nd BB is won, regardless of the winning game, the processing for starting AT mode will not be performed, and the right to shift to AT mode will be lost. It is also possible to realize playability.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, a novel game feature using the present invention will be described, such as executing specific processing related to the instruction function when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the judgment information storage area 106f. . FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing AT start game determination processing in this embodiment. As already described, the AT start game determination process is a process that is executed when the number of bets is a specific specified number according to the gaming state and the portent flag is set in the winning result handling process.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the number of games AG in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of games set in the AT start determination area. is cleared, and a process of adding 50 to the AT counter is executed in step S3503. Then, in step S3504, specific determination content setting processing is executed, and in steps S3505 to S3510, AT mode start processing is executed. The processing of steps S3505 to S3510 is the same as the processing of steps S1304 to S1309.

Specific determination content setting processing in step S3504 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specific determination content setting process is a process of determining the content of the specific process related to the instruction function to be executed in the game set in the determination information storage area 106f.

In step S3601, a specific addition lottery process is executed. In the specific add-on lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to execute the AT mode add-on process as the specific process. The probability of winning the specific additional lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, if the specific additional lottery process is configured to win the specific additional lottery with a probability of 50%, the AT mode will be performed once every two times as the specific process. Processing for addition is executed. After executing the specific addition lottery process in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the specific addition lottery process is won in step S3602. If the prize has been won, in step S3603, a process of setting a specific addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The specific addition flag is a flag for ascertaining that when the CPU 102 performs specific processing related to the instruction function, AT mode additional processing should be executed as the specific processing. Then, in step S3604, a process of setting a specific additional winning command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3602, or after the processing of step S3604 is executed, in step S3605, 10 games are added to the current advantageous interval game number AG as the predetermined number of games in the specific determination area in the determination information storage area 106f. Execute the process of inputting the number of games to which the games are added. Then, in step S3606, after executing the process of setting the contents setting command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this specific contents setting process ends. The content setting command is a command for making the display control device 81 recognize that the number of games for which the specific process is to be executed has been input to the specific determination area.

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing the specific determination area processing in this embodiment.

The processing of steps S3701 to S3710 is the same as the processing of steps S1701 to S1710, and the game in which the number of advantageous interval games AG is set in the AT start determination area, CZ end determination area, and specialized end determination area Pre-processing for executing a specific process is executed when the number is reached.

In step S3711, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is the number of games set in the specific determination area. That is, since the number of games obtained by adding 10 to the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is set in the specific judgment area in the processing for starting the AT mode as described above, the specific judgment is performed after 10 games from the start of the AT mode. The number of games set for the area will be reached. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3111, specific determination processing is executed in step S3112.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73, the specific determination process determines whether or not any BB status flag is set in step S3801. is 3. Also, if any of the BB status flags is set, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S3803. That is, the process of steps S3801 to S3803 is a process of determining whether or not the number of bets in the current game is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state.

If the determination is affirmative in step S3802 or step S3803 and it is the specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3804. In step S3804, it is determined whether or not the specific addition flag is set. If the specific addition flag is set, in step S3805, processing for clearing the specific addition flag is executed. Then, in step S3806, the number-of-addition-games lottery process is executed.

In addition, in the number-of-additional-games lottery process in this embodiment, the number of games to be added this time is selected by lottery from the number of games to be added from 10 to 50 games, and the average number of games to be added is set to 20 games. For example, like a normal game number lottery process, the number of games to be added may be set to vary according to the lottery result of the current game. It may be set so that the number of additional games to be added to the chance C, which has a lower appearance rate than the chance C, is more likely to be selected. Also, the number of additional games may be set to vary depending on the setting value set by the winning probability setting process, or may be set such that the higher the setting, the more likely the number of additional games will be selected.

After executing the number-of-additional-games lottery process in step S3806, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the AT counter is executed in step S3807. Then, in step S3808, a specific add-on command including information on the number of add-on games this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG.

In step S3804, if the specific addition flag is not set and the specific addition lottery was not won in the previous specific determination content setting process, the process proceeds to step S3809. In step S3809, subtraction game number lottery processing is executed. The subtraction game number lottery process is a process for executing a specific process of subtracting the number of games determined by lottery from the current remaining number of games in the AT mode, and determining the number of games to be subtracted.

In the subtraction game number lottery process in the present embodiment, the current subtraction game number is selected by lottery from the subtraction game numbers of 10 to 50 games, and the average subtraction game number is set to 20 games. For example, like the addition game number lottery process, it may be set so that the number of subtraction games may differ according to the lottery result of the current game. A chance number C having a lower appearance rate than A may be set so that a smaller number of games to be subtracted is more likely to be selected. Also, the number of games to be subtracted may be set so as to be different depending on the setting value set by the winning probability setting process, or the number of games to be subtracted may be set so that the higher the setting, the smaller the number of games to be subtracted. Further, in the subtraction game number lottery process, the maximum subtraction game number may be changed each time so that the subtraction game number is less than the current remaining game number in the AT mode. Furthermore, instead of determining the number of games to be subtracted by lottery, it is also possible to use a lottery to determine what percentage of the number of remaining games in the current AT mode is to be subtracted. If there are 50 games and it is determined that 40% of the number of games should be subtracted, the number of games to be subtracted may be 20 games.

After executing the number-of-subtraction-games lottery process in step S3809, the process of subtracting the number of games to be subtracted this time from the AT counter is executed in step S3810. Then, in step S 3811 , a subtraction command including information on the number of games to be subtracted this time is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 .

Note that in a configuration where the number of subtraction games equal to or greater than the number of remaining games in the current AT mode can be determined in the subtraction game number lottery process, when the subtraction process of step S3810 is performed, the value of the AT counter is greater than the current value. Occasionally, a value may be subtracted from the AT counter. In this case, for example, by setting the AT counter to 0 instead of setting it to a negative value, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a processing error. When subtracting a value greater than the value of the AT counter, the processing for ending the AT mode (steps S1206 to S1211) is executed in the next game. When subtracting a value greater than the value of the AT counter, a configuration may be adopted in which processing for ending the AT mode is executed in the current game.

After executing the process of step S3808 or step S3811, in step S3812, specific determination content setting process is executed, and then this specific determination process ends. The specific determination content setting process is the process shown in FIG. 71, and is a process for setting the specific process to be executed after 10 games (AT mode game number addition process or AT mode game number subtraction process). is. That is, after 10 games from the start of the AT mode, the addition or subtraction is performed, and after 10 games, the addition or subtraction is performed. The content of is determined by lottery as a specific additional lottery.

If a negative determination is made in step S3802 or step S3803, and the number of bets in the current game is not the specific prescribed number according to the gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3813. In step S3813, a process of setting an avoidance flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. Then, in step S3814, after executing a process of setting the avoidance command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, this specific determination process is terminated. The avoidance flag in the present embodiment is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that execution of the specific process has been avoided in the number of games set in the specific determination area. This is a command to let the

In the specific determination area processing, if a negative determination is made in step S3711 or after the processing of step S3712 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3713. In step S3713, it is determined whether or not the avoidance flag is set. If the avoidance flag is set, it is determined in steps S3714 to S3716 whether or not the number of bets in the current game is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. That is, in step S3714, it is determined whether or not any BB status flag is set, and if not set, in step S3715, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3. If any BB status flag is set, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 2 in step S3716. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3715 or step S3716 and the number is the specific prescribed number, then in step S3717, the specific determination content setting process (FIG. 71) is executed. Then, in step S3718, the processing for clearing the avoidance flag is executed, and then the processing for the specific determination region ends. If a negative determination is made in step S3713, step S3715, or step S3716, the process for the specific determination area is terminated.

Regarding the specific processing executed for each predetermined game in the AT mode as described above, the specific determination effect setting processing executed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specific determination effect setting process is, for example, a process executed as one process of step S2409 in the effect setting process (FIG. 50) at the time of all stop. It should be noted that the specific determination effect setting process will be explained while showing examples of the effect contents of FIGS. 75 to 78 .

In step S3901, it is determined whether or not a content setting command has been received as the current all stop command. The content setting command is a command output from the main controller 101 side when the specific determination content setting process is executed. When the content setting command is received, in step S3902, a process of inputting 10 corresponding to the number of games until the specific process is performed to the specific determination counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. In the subsequent step S3903, it is determined whether or not a specific additional winning command has been received as the current all stop command. The specific addition winning command is a command output from the main controller 101 side when winning the specific addition lottery process in the specific determination content setting process. When the specific add-on winning command is received, at step S3904, the process of setting the specific add-on winning flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S3901 or step S3903, or after the processing of step S3904 has been executed, the specific determination counter is decremented in step S3905. This process is for updating the specific determination counter set in step S3902 in accordance with the progress of the game, and in step S3905, 1 is subtracted from the specific determination counter.

As described above, the specific determination counter is a counter corresponding to the number of games played until specific processing is executed in the AT mode. , the number of games corresponding to the value of the specific determination counter is displayed as the display of the number of games up to the specific determination. Then, every time the value of the specific determination counter is updated in step S3905, update processing for displaying the number of games up to the specific determination is executed in step S3906. FIG. 75(a) shows that the number of games up to the specific determination is 10 games, and FIG. 75(b) shows that the number of games up to the specific determination is 1 game. Incidentally, in this embodiment, in addition to displaying the number of games up to the specific determination, the number of remaining AT mode games is also displayed. For example, FIG. 75(a) shows that the number of remaining AT mode games is 50 games, and FIG. 75(b) shows that the number of remaining AT mode games is 41 games.

After executing the processing of step S3906, it is determined whether or not the specific addition winning flag is set in step S3907. When the specific add-on win flag is set, in steps S3908 to S3910, the content of the next specific process is a process for executing a suggestive effect suggesting that the AT mode add-on process. I do.

That is, in step S3908, a suggestion effect lottery process is executed. The suggesting effect lottery process is a process of determining by lottery whether or not to execute the suggesting effect. Although the winning probability of the suggesting effect lottery is arbitrary, for example, the winning probability of the suggesting effect lottery may differ depending on the set value set in the winning probability setting process. You may make it easy to win. In addition, the winning probability of the suggestive effect lottery may differ according to the content of the previous specific processing, and the suggestive effect lottery is more likely to be won when the content of the previous specific processing is subtraction processing than when it is addition processing. You may make it easy to be elected to. Furthermore, the winning probability of the suggestion effect lottery may differ depending on whether or not the execution of the previous specific process has been avoided, and the case where the previous specific process has not been avoided is higher than the case where the previous specific process has been avoided. You may make it easy to win a suggestion production lottery.

After executing the suggestive effect lottery process in step S3908, it is determined whether or not the suggestive effect lottery is won in step S3909. At 64, effect setting processing is executed. As the suggestive effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 78(b), an effect is set in which a predetermined character is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the left end) of the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. Incidentally, FIG. 78(a) shows the effect contents when the suggestive effect lottery is not won, and the predetermined character as the suggestive effect is not displayed in FIG. 78(a).

If a negative determination is made in step S3907 or step S3909, or if the process of step S3910 has been executed, the process advances to step S3911. In step S3911, it is determined whether or not any one of the specific addition command, subtraction command, and avoidance command has been received as the current all-stop command. If neither command has been received, the specific determination effect setting process is terminated as it is. Receiving any of these commands means that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the number of games set in the specific determination area, and the specific determination process has been carried out on the main controller 101 side. is the case. In this case, in step S3912, an effect setting process for performing the specific determination time effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. As an effect at the time of specific determination, for example, as shown in FIG. 76(a), characters such as "JUDGE" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 to notify the player that the game is scheduled to perform specific processing. It is assumed that it can be grasped clearly. Note that, in a game in which a specific determination time effect is performed, when a pressing order notification effect is performed, the content of the pressing order notification effect is reduced in a predetermined area (for example, the right corner) of the auxiliary display section 65. , the player can enjoy the performance at the time of specific determination while grasping the content of the notification of the pressing order. It should be noted that the visibility of the pressing order notification effect is the same in relation to other effects (for example, FIG. 76(b), FIG. 77(a)).

At step S3912, after executing the processing for the effect at the time of the specific determination, it is determined at step S3913 whether or not the specific addition command is received. When the specific addition command is received, in step S3914, the effect setting process for performing the addition effect on the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 is executed. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays "+20" or the like corresponding to the current number of additional games, so that the content of the current specific processing is displayed. It is possible for the player to clearly grasp the fact that the processing was an addition process and the number of games added by the addition process.

If it is determined in step S3913 that the specific addition command has not been received, it is determined in step S3915 whether or not the subtraction command has been received. When the subtraction command is received, in step S3916, an effect setting process for performing the subtraction effect on the auxiliary display section 65 or the speaker 64 is executed. As the subtraction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays "-20" or the like corresponding to the number of games to be subtracted this time. is a subtraction process and the number of games subtracted by the subtraction process can be clearly grasped by the player.

If it is determined in step S3915 that the subtraction command has not been received, it means that the avoidance command has been received. Execute the effect setting process for the purpose. As the avoidance effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays, for example, a ninja character so that the player can grasp that the execution of the specific process has been avoided. be done. Incidentally, the game in which the avoidance effect is performed is the case where the game is played with the number of bets different from the specific prescribed number, and in this case, as shown in FIG. 77(b), the limit effect is also executed.

After executing the process of step S3914, step S3916 or step S3917, in step S3918, after executing the process of clearing the specific addition winning flag, this specific determination effect setting process is terminated. In addition, in step S3918, when the specific addition winning flag is not set, that state is maintained.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of games is set in the specific determination area so that the specific process is performed during the AT mode, and when the number of games set in the specific determination area is reached, the specific process is performed. Since either the addition processing or the subtraction processing is performed as processing, the addition processing that increases the number of remaining AT mode games is performed while taking the risk of reducing the remaining number of AT mode games. It is possible to make the game set in the specific determination area desired while expecting the Moreover, if the risk is disliked, it is possible to avoid the execution of the specific processing by playing a game set in the specific determination area in the 2-bet game. It is possible for the player to decide whether or not to execute the specific process in consideration of the number of remaining games in the AT mode and the risk, thereby realizing novel game characteristics that have never existed before.

Since the contents of the next specific process can be grasped in advance by the suggestive effect, it is possible to determine whether or not to avoid the specific process by the suggestive effect. By doing so, it is possible to realize not only the game in which the specific process is performed, but also the game prior to the specific process to have interesting gameplay that attracts the player's interest.

In addition, in the above configuration, the suggestive effect can occur only when the specific additional lottery is won, but it is configured so that the suggestive effect can occur even when the specific adder lottery is not won. In this case, the occurrence rate may be higher when the specific addition lottery is won than when the specific addition lottery is not won.

As mentioned above, it is possible to avoid the specific process by simply switching the number of bets. Inconveniences that cannot be avoided are unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to equally enjoy the above-mentioned novel game characteristics regardless of the player's skill level.

In addition, after the number of games set in the specific determination area is reached and the specific process is executed, the specific addition lottery is performed again and the specific determination area is set, so that these additions or subtractions are performed. Triggers will now occur repeatedly during AT mode. Therefore, it is possible to continuously expect the effect of improving the interest in the AT mode and keeping the player from getting bored.

The maximum number of games to be added when the specific addition lottery is won and the maximum number of games to be subtracted when the specific addition lottery is not won are set to 50 games, and the games between the specific processing and the specific processing. Since the number of games is set to 10, which is less than the maximum number of games, it becomes an opportunity game in which the specific processing is performed in a shorter cycle, and the effect of not getting bored can be expected more favorably.

In addition, the average number of games to be added and the average number of games to be subtracted are 20 games, which is more than the number of games between the specific processes, so the AT mode by the specific process. The fluctuation range of the number of remaining games is greater than the number of games between the specific processing and the specific processing, and the degree of influence of the increase and decrease of the number of remaining games in the specific processing on the number of remaining games is large. Become. Therefore, the interest in the specific process is heightened, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of the embodiments and modifications, and it is also possible to apply a combination of some or all of them.

(1) Specific processing related to the instruction function that can be executed when the number of games AG in the advantageous section reaches the number of games set in each region of the determination information storage area 106f is the processing for starting AT mode and ending CZ mode. , processing for ending the special zone, processing for reaching the ceiling, processing for specific addition, processing for subtracting the number of games, and the like. For example, it may be processing for ending the AT mode or processing for starting the CZ mode.

In the case of processing for ending the AT mode, for example, at the start of the AT mode, based on the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the number of continuous games is added to the current number of games in the advantageous section AG, and the added number of games is It may be set in the corresponding area of the judgment information storage area 106f, and when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the corresponding area, the processing for ending the AT mode may be executed. In this case, if the game that has reached the number of games set in the corresponding area is a game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number, such as a two-bet game, the processing for ending the AT mode in that game execution will be avoided. Therefore, for example, when a game is played with a specific prescribed number of bets after the relevant game, by executing processing for ending the AT mode, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of the AT mode continuing indefinitely. becomes.

Also, for example, if the process for ending the AT mode is not executed in the game, the number of games for which the process for ending the AT mode should be performed when games are played with a specific prescribed number of bets thereafter. may be configured to be reset. By doing so, it is possible to realize novel gameplay such as how to continue the AT mode while avoiding a game in which the process for ending the AT mode may be performed, such as a two-bet game. can. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of games are set for executing the process for ending the AT mode. More specifically, for example, the number of games to be processed for ending the AT mode at the start of the AT mode is set as after 10 games, after 30 games, after 50 games, and so on. By playing the game, it is possible to realize the playability of advancing the AT mode while avoiding the execution of the processing for ending the AT mode. In this case, as in the fifth embodiment, after the 10th game, after the 30th game, after the 50th game, the processing for ending the AT mode is performed, and the processing for ending the AT mode is executed. , specific processing related to instruction functions with different degrees of advantage (e.g., processing for executing push order notification for shifting the RT state) and other processing (e.g., processing for generating setting value suggestive effects) are performed. , and which process is to be executed is determined by lottery or the like. Even in this way, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the player selects whether to execute the specific process or to avoid the 2-bet game after the 10th game or the like. Further, the number of games in which the processing for ending the AT mode, which is set plurally as described above, can be executed is determined by a lottery, and the player may have a configuration in which it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the number of games. By doing so, it is possible to provide a thrilling feeling that the AT mode proceeds without knowing when the process for ending the AT mode will be executed.

(2) The initial set value (initial number of games) of each region in the determination information storage area 106f is set to be the number of games larger than the upper limit number of games (1500) of the advantageous section, but the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section may be used. . If the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section is reached, the corresponding specific process is executed, but the forced termination process of the advantageous section is performed in the end. Also, the initial set value may be a negative number of games. Furthermore, as an initial set value, it may be configured such that no number of games is input.

(3) For example, when performing AT mode start processing, the number of games in the advantageous section AG becomes equal to or greater than the number of games set in the AT start determination area in a situation where the precursor flag is set, so that the AT mode Although it is configured to execute the process for starting, regardless of the presence or absence of the precursor flag, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is equal to or greater than the number of games set in the AT start determination area, and the game is determined. If the number is greater than or equal to the number, the configuration may be such that the process for starting the AT mode is executed. That is, the portent flag is not essential for executing the specific process regarding the instruction function when the number of games in the advantageous interval AG reaches the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f. However, in order for the CPU 102 to determine whether or not it is after winning the AT mode transition lottery, it is possible to grasp from the precursor flag that the number of games for which the process for starting the AT mode is to be executed is set in the AT start determination area. preferably. Note that the number of games is not stored in the AT start determination area until the AT mode transition lottery is won. A configuration may be adopted in which the CPU 102 determines that there is. In this case, when the number of games is set in the AT start determination area and the number of games in the advantageous section AG is the number of games (or more) set in the AT start determination area, the AT mode start It is preferable to have a configuration that executes the processing of

Incidentally, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the AT mode ends, the advantageous interval also ends. If (the number of games is greater than or equal to the number of games), it means the state before the AT mode transition corresponding to the AT mode transition winning that triggered the setting of the number of games in the AT start determination area. . However, in a configuration in which the advantageous section may not end when the AT mode ends, when the AT mode ends, the number of games in the AT start determination area is initialized (process set to 1501). good.

(4) In the case of winning the AT mode transfer lottery, it is configured to transfer to the specialized zone, but in addition or instead of that, for example, based on a predetermined trigger such as the start of AT mode, to the specialized zone is set in a predetermined area in the determination information storage area 106f, and when the advantageous interval game number AG reaches the number of games set in the predetermined area, as one of the specific processes related to the instruction function, a special A configuration may be adopted in which the process of moving to the conversion zone can be executed. In this case, until the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the predetermined area, the fact that the AT mode continues is set as the execution condition for the process of shifting to the specialized zone, so that in the AT mode It is possible to realize game characteristics such that the target is set to the number of games set in a predetermined area, and if the target is cleared, a benefit (additional special zone) is given. If the execution condition for the process of shifting to the specialized zone is that the AT mode continues, the advantageous section is also terminated when the AT mode is terminated, and the number of games set in the predetermined area is initialized. Alternatively, even if the advantageous section is not terminated when the AT mode is terminated, the number of games set in the predetermined area may be initialized when the AT mode is terminated. Also, the number of games set in the predetermined area (attainment goal in AT mode) is arbitrary, but for example, by setting it to 1000 games, which is close to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section (AT mode), the game is reached. By doing so, it is possible to realize a game property such that it is easy to continue up to the upper limit number of games due to the benefit of the additional specialized zone.

(5) A configuration may be provided in which output means for externally outputting the number of games set in each area of the determination information storage area 106f from the main controller 101 is provided. As output destinations for external output, in addition to the display control device 81, a hall computer in a game hall, and a data display provided for each game machine or for a plurality of game machines are assumed. For example, by configuring to output to the hall computer of the game hall, it is possible to manage the hall whether specific processing related to the corresponding instruction function is executed in the set number of games or in the number of games close to the number of games. can be confirmed by the person. Therefore, an act of illegally avoiding the execution of the specific process or causing the specific process to be performed without setting the number of games corresponding to the determination information storage area 106f, etc., to enjoy an illegal profit. is done, it will be possible to detect the act easily. It should be noted that when a specific process related to the instruction function is executed, information to that effect and/or information on the processing result of the specific process related to the instruction function may also be externally output to a hall computer or the like.

(6) In the initialization process of the advantageous section information, the initialization process of the AT start determination area, etc. (Fig. 42(b)) is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the initialization processing of the area to be performed is performed. For example, when the AT mode start process is executed based on the number of games in the advantageous section AG becoming the number of games set in the AT start determination area, the AT start determination area is initialized (set 1501 games). ) may be configured.

(7) Although the 1st BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 3-bet game and the 2nd BB is provided as the BB that can be won in the 2-bet game, either one of the BBs may be used. A configuration may be adopted in which the second BB is won in the bet game, and none of the BBs is won in the 3-bet game.

(8) In the 2-bet game, the 2nd BB is won. It is good also as a structure which can be elected. In this case, the first BB winning and the second BB winning are established in the 2-bet game, the first BB and the second BB are not won in the 3-betting game, and the first BB and the second BB are winning in the 3-betting game. A configuration in which neither 2BB winning is established may be adopted. Note that the relationship between the 2-bet game and the 3-bet game may be reversed.

(9) The same lottery table is used for the first BB state and the second BB state, and the same game base is used.

(10) Both the first BB state and the second BB state are configured to play a 3-bet game. The number of bets may be different depending on the type of BB state, such as playing with the BB state. In this case, each game in the first BB state is a game with the number of bets different from the specified specified number, and each game in the second BB state is a game with the specified specified number of bets.

(11) The games in the first BB state and the second BB state are both configured to restrict the execution of instruction functions such as processing for notification of pressing order and specific processing. A configuration in which the presence or absence of restrictions differs depending on the type of BB state, such that the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is restricted while the execution of processing related to these instruction functions is permitted in the game in the second BB state. good. Further, a CB state, an SB state, and an MB state may be provided, and processing related to each instruction function may be restricted or not restricted in any or all of them.

(12) Although the 3-bet game does not allow the 2nd BB win and the 2-bet game does not allow the 1st BB win, the 3-bet game is more difficult to win the 2nd BB than the 2-bet game. A structure may be adopted, and a structure may be adopted in which it is more difficult to win the first BB in a 2-bet game than in a 3-bet game.

(13) In the 3-bet game, the 2nd BB is not won, and in the 2-bet game, the 1st BB is not won. The game may have a configuration in which it is more difficult to win the first BB than in the 3-bet game.

(14) An operation unit that can set one bet may be provided. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of bets can be varied according to the number of times the operation unit is operated. Specifically, when the operation unit is operated once, a 1-bet is made, when it is operated twice, a 2-bet is made, and when it is operated 3 times, a 3-bet is made. Furthermore, if you operate 4 times, it will be 1 bet, and if you operate it 5 times, it will be 2 bets. A possible configuration is preferable.

(15) Main controller 101 performs processing for setting the number of games for executing specific processing related to the instruction function in judgment information storage area 106f. When the number of games set in the area 106f is reached, the specific processing related to the corresponding instruction function is executed. It may be a device. For example, the main controller 101 performs processing for setting the number of games in which the specific process relating to the instruction function is executed in the determination information storage area 106f, while the number of advantageous interval games AG is set in the determination information storage area 106f. When the number of games has been reached, a command to that effect may be output to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may execute specific processing related to the corresponding instruction function.

(16) Modes such as continuous effects and suggestive effects are examples, and other effects may be used. For example, regarding the continuous effect, the result effect of the victory effect or the defeat effect is finally executed, but the structure may end without executing any result effect. In this case, if the AT mode transition is won, the victory performance is executed with the fact that the fixed performance is executed (the performance pattern of the fixed performance is selected) before the game in which the victory performance is executed. It is also possible to terminate the continuous performance without executing the defeat performance if the AT mode shift is not won.

(17) As the predictive game number, a larger number of games may be selected, or a smaller number of games may be selected. In addition, it is configured such that the continuous effect is performed over the number of precursor games and the number of continuous games in the CZ mode triggered by winning the AT mode shift or the CZ mode transition, but the continuous effect is started after a predetermined precursor effect. It may be configured to be

(18) When a game is played with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number, the configuration is such that a limited effect is executed in each game, but from the game with the specific prescribed number of bets, the bet number other than the specific prescribed number While the limited effect is executed in the game switched to the game by, even if the subsequent game is a game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number, if the game with the bet number other than the specific prescribed number continues A configuration in which the restricted effect is not performed may be adopted. Further, in a game with a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number, whether or not to execute the limited effect may be determined by lottery.

(19) When an AT mode transition lottery based on a specific role is held, if the AT mode transition lottery is won, by shifting to a specialized zone, the game is played until the AT mode start process is performed. is more advantageous for the player than playing with the number of bets other than the specified number of bets. In the predetermined game from 1 to 20, when the process for starting the AT mode is performed, it is more advantageous for the player to play the game with a specific prescribed number of bets than to play with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number. For example, in such a predetermined game, it may be configured such that playing with a specific prescribed number of bets is more likely to generate a set value suggestion effect than playing with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number.

In addition, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, in the game until the process for starting the AT mode is performed, an AT mode promotion lottery (a promotion lottery from the first AT mode to the second AT mode) may be executed. good. In this case, the promotion lottery for the AT mode may be executed in a game with a specific prescribed number of bets, but not in a game with a bet number other than the specific prescribed number.

(20) When the AT mode transition lottery is won, the game state transition does not occur until the process for starting the AT mode is performed, unless a BB prize is won. It is also possible to provide an RT state with a different probability of becoming, and perform the process for starting the AT mode after causing the RT state transition when the AT mode transition lottery is won. In this case, notification of the pressing order when a transition combination is won, which causes a transition of the RT state, can be performed in games with a specific specified number of bets, but cannot be performed in games with a bet number other than the specified specified number. Therefore, after winning the AT mode transition lottery, it is possible to make it necessary to play a predetermined game with a specific prescribed number of bets until at least the process for starting the AT mode is performed.

(21) When the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games set in the judgment information storage area 106f, if the game is a game with a number of bets other than the specific prescribed number, processing for ending the CZ mode or special As for the processing for ending the zone, the CZ end flag and specialization end flag are set, and next time a game is played with a specific prescribed number of bets, the determination information storage area 106f is checked. By checking these CZ end flags and specialization end flags, the processing for ending the CZ mode and the processing for ending the specialized zone are configured to be executed. After confirming that the number of games in the advantageous section AG is greater than or equal to the number of games set in the judgment information storage area 106f in the game with the prescribed number of bets, specific processing related to the corresponding instruction function is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(22) The number of games in the advantageous section AG and the determination information storage area 106f are used to execute the specific processing related to the instruction function. The number of games since the opening of the store, the total number of games since shipment of the gaming machine from the factory, etc., and the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f may be used to execute specific processing related to the instruction function. good.

(23) The number of games in the advantageous section AG and the information storage area 106f for judgment are used to execute specific processing related to the instruction function. In addition to or instead of specific processing related to the instruction function, for example, processing related to a predetermined effect (for example, a suggestive effect of a set value), processing related to an advantageous section (for example, processing for ending an advantageous section), each reel 32L , 32M, and 32R, processing for changing the lottery table of each game, and the like.

(24) The number of games set in each area of the determination information storage area 106f and the specific processing related to the instruction function were associated in a one-to-one relationship. When the number of games set in the corresponding area of the determination information storage area 106f is reached, the content of the specific processing relating to the instruction function is determined by lottery, and the specific processing of the content corresponding to the result of the lottery is executed. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

(25) By shifting to the specialized zone, the odds of winning the additional lottery are improved, but in addition or instead of this, it may be configured to increase the number of games to be added when the additional lottery is won.

(26) When the AT mode shift lottery is won, the player is always shifted to the specialized zone. good too. In this case, the continuous production may be executed when shifting to the specialized zone, and the continuous production may not be executed when not shifting to the specialized zone.

(27) Although the number of games in the CZ mode and the specialized zone is uniformly set to 10 games, the number of games may be determined by lottery or the like.

(28) The number of CZ mode games is uniformly set to 10 games, while the number of premonitory games in the case of winning the AT mode transition lottery is determined by lottery. and the number of games set in the CZ end determination area may differ, but a common number of games may be set in the AT start determination area and the CZ end determination area regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is correct or not. .

(29) When AT mode transition is won, the game is immediately shifted to the special zone. In this case, the predetermined number of games may be determined by lottery.

(30) If the AT mode transition is not elected and the CZ mode transition is elected, it is configured to immediately transition to the CZ mode. may be configured to shift to the CZ mode at . In this case, the predetermined number of games may be determined by lottery.

(31) Executed when the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f is reached in the game a predetermined number of games before the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f. A configuration may be adopted in which a notification corresponding to the content of the specified process is executed. For example, as in the fourth embodiment, if the number of games set in the AT start determination area is not played with a specific prescribed number of bets, then the process for starting the AT mode is not executed. It is also possible to call attention to prevent the winning of the first BB or the second BB by notifying in advance the number of games a predetermined number of games before the number of games set in the start determination area. In this case, by setting the predetermined number of games to be equal to or greater than the number of continuous games in the first BB state or the second BB state, the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and before it is too late, the above-mentioned first BB is executed. The significance of calling attention to prevent establishment of a prize or a second BB prize is guaranteed.

(32) The net increase in the number of medals per game in the 1st BB state and the 2nd BB state is set to about plus 0.00, and the medals neither increase nor decrease in the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state. A configuration in which the number of medals can be increased or a configuration in which the number of medals can be decreased may be used. In this case, it is sufficient that the net increase number in the first BB state and the second BB state is at least greater than the net increase number in the case of playing the internal state or the non-internal state in the 3-bet game.

(33) In the fifth embodiment, the cycle of executing the specific determination process may be random. Specifically, when the specific determination content setting process is executed, the number of games obtained by uniformly adding 10 to the number of games in the current advantageous zone AG is set in the specific determination area. may be added to the number of games in the advantageous interval AG, and the value may be set in the specific determination area.

(34) Execution of each process related to the instruction function is allowed by the player playing the internal state or non-internal state in a 2-bet game instead of a 3-bet game, or by establishing a 1st BB win or a 2nd BB win. Although it is configured to shift from the state of being restricted to the state of being restricted, the gaming machine is configured to shift from the state of allowing the execution of each process related to the instruction function to the state of being restricted by, for example, completing a predetermined number of games. may be

(35) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Further, setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(36) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(37) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having ball-inserting and ball-paying functions like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) in place of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

(38) In the above embodiment, a game machine can be started by setting the number of bets by inserting medals as game media, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out as a privilege corresponding to the winning of the game. However, it does not deny the medal-less type gaming machine that does not use medals. In such a medalless type gaming machine, for example, a game can be started by setting the number of bets for the game using a virtual game medium (predetermined game value). A configuration may be adopted in which virtual game media (predetermined game value) are awarded in accordance with a predetermined number of medals. In this case, the number of virtual game media may be displayed on a predetermined display unit, or information corresponding to the number of virtual game media may be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

Further, the pachinko machine described above may be not only a type of pachinko machine in which game balls are paid out, but also may be an enclosed type pachinko machine in which game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine. In such an enclosed type pachinko machine, for example, information indicating the number of winning balls may be notified.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game;
Lottery means (executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. function) and
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, game value giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) for giving a predetermined number of game values as a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means (main control means) capable of executing mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
a game number grasping means (advantage section game number AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (AT mode transition winning, AT mode transition non-winning) occurs, specific processing related to the mode notification by the mode notification means (process for starting AT mode, CZ mode corresponding information setting means (for example, AT A function that executes processing such as setting the number of games in the start determination area and the CZ end determination area),
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means becomes a specific number as a scheduled number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area, the specific process can be executed. a process executing means (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode and a process for ending the CZ mode by the main controller 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is followed. Different benefits can be given to the player by making the player perform the operation. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the superiority of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and a sense of anticipation is given to the transition to the advantageous state. You can play a game while playing. Moreover, in this gaming machine, when the number of games played in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, a specific process relating to mode notification is executed. It can also make you look forward to it. In this case, when the specific trigger occurs, the correspondence information is set in the determination area so that the specific process is executed. It is not necessary to memorize the fact until the execution of the specific processing, and by grasping the presence or absence of the corresponding information, it is possible to confirm that it has already occurred after the specific trigger has occurred, or to execute the specific processing after the specific trigger has occurred. It is possible to determine whether the situation is the same as before, whether the specific process should be executed, etc., based only on the number of games grasped by the number of games grasping means and the correspondence information of the judgment area. Simplification can be achieved.

Feature A2. A first game (a game with a specific prescribed number of bets according to a gaming state) in which at least the mode notification by the mode notification means and the execution of the specific process by the specific process execution means are allowed, and the mode notification means a second game (a game with a bet number other than a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state) in which execution of the specific process by the specific process executing means is restricted;
is set and
The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the game number grasping means grasps the number of games including the first game and the second game.

According to the above configuration, the first game in which execution of mode notification and specific processing is allowed and the second game in which execution of mode notification and specific processing is restricted are set. It is possible to allow the player to play the game property using the state notification as designed, such as switching to the second game in a situation in which the state notification should not be performed according to the progress.

On the other hand, since the number of games in the advantageous state is grasped by the game number grasping means including both the first game and the second game, for example, execution of state notification in the second game Even if is avoided, the count of the number of games up to the specific number proceeds. In other words, the number of games played until the specific process is executed is grasped, including the number of games played in the second game. Since the execution of the specific process is also restricted in the second game, the first It is possible to realize novel playability by proceeding with the game while switching between the game and the second game.

Feature A3. Means for grasping that the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means has reached the specific number in the second game (the number of advantageous interval games AG is judged by the specific area judgment processing by the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to feature A2, further comprising: a function of executing determination processing that the number of games set in each area of the game information storage area 106f has been reached.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the execution of the specific process is restricted even when the specific number is reached in the second game, the fact that the specific number has been reached is grasped even in the second game. be. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that the execution of the specific process is restricted. Compared to a configuration that makes it possible to grasp what has happened, it is possible to avoid a temporary increase in the processing load because there is a grace period for executing processing and notification after the grasp.

Feature A4. Bet amount setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion port 45) for setting the game bet amount,
The lottery means performs the lottery according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means,
The expected increase, which is the average value per game of the difference between the game value imparted by the game value imparting means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, is higher than that in the first game. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or feature A3, characterized in that the gaming machine is set so that the game is higher.

According to the above configuration, although mode notification and specific processing are not performed in the second game, the expected increase in the game value per game is greater than in the first game. A situation may occur in which it is more advantageous for the player to play the game as the second game. By doing so, it is possible to suitably realize a game property utilizing switching between the first game and the second game.

Feature A5. When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the ending means for ending the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state (upper limit number of games by main controller 101) A function that executes processing for the end of the advantageous section based on the arrival),
initialization means for executing predetermined initialization processing (function for executing initialization processing for advantageous section information by main controller 101);
with
When the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, information corresponding to the number of games larger than the upper limit number is set as initial information in the determination area. 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, since the initial information of the judgment area is set to the information corresponding to the number of games larger than the upper limit number of the advantageous state, the specific processing is executed without the occurrence of the specific trigger in the advantageous state. It is possible to preferably avoid that the

Feature A6. As the specific trigger, at least a first specific trigger (AT mode transition won) and a second specific trigger (AT mode transition not won) are set,
The correspondence information setting means
In the advantageous state, when the first specific trigger occurs, the first predetermined number of games to execute the first specific process (process for starting AT mode) as the specific process is set in the determination area (AT start determination area) as correspondence information (for example, a function of executing a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main control device 101);
In the advantageous state, when the second specific opportunity (AT mode transition non-winning) occurs, as the specific process, a second specific process (process for ending CZ mode) different from the first specific process is executed. Second correspondence information setting means for setting the second planned number of games to be played as correspondence information in the judgment area (CZ end judgment area) functions to perform) and
with
The specific process executing means is
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means becomes a first specific number as the first planned number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area, the first specific number a first specific process executing means (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode by the main controller 101) capable of executing the process;
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means becomes a second specific number as the second predetermined number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area, the second specific number a second specific process executing means (a function of executing a process for ending the CZ mode by the main controller 101) capable of executing the process;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the first specific opportunity and the second specific opportunity occur, the first planned number of games and the second planned number of games are stored as specific information, respectively, and the number of games in an advantageous state becomes the first specific number. When reaching the number, the first specific process is executed, and when reaching the second specific number, the second specific process is executed. In this way, by clarifying that the content of the specific process and the number of games to be executed are not the same, it is possible to realize more diverse game features with a simpler configuration.

Feature A7. The judgment area in which the correspondence information is set by the first correspondence information setting means and the judgment area in which the correspondence information is set by the second correspondence information setting means are common judgment areas. The gaming machine according to feature A6.

According to the above configuration, since a common determination area is used, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity compared to a configuration in which a determination area is used for each specific process.

Feature A8. The first scheduled number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set by the first corresponding information setting means and the second scheduled number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set by the second corresponding information setting means have a common number of games. The gaming machine according to feature A6 or feature A7, characterized in that:

According to the above configuration, the first specific process and the second specific process are performed in the same game in an advantageous state. In this way, by allowing a plurality of types of specific processing to be performed in the same game, the degree of freedom in the configuration that allows execution of a plurality of types of specific processing by setting each piece of correspondence information in the determination area is increased. significantly improved.

Feature A9. Advantage determination means for determining whether or not to generate an advantageous event that is advantageous to the player (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main controller 101, and a specific addition lottery process by the main controller 101) function),
The first specific opportunity occurs when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a response result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
Any one of features A6 to A8, characterized in that the second specific opportunity is generated when the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a non-corresponding result that does not correspond to the occurrence of the advantageous event. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, whether the first specific process is executed or the second specific event occurs depends on whether the result of the advantageous determination is correct or not. That is, when the result of the advantageous judgment is the corresponding result, the correspondence information corresponding to the first scheduled number of games is set in the judgment area, the first specific process is performed, and the result of the advantageous judgment is the non-corresponding result. In this case, the correspondence information corresponding to the second expected number of games is set in the determination area, and the second specifying process is performed. In this way, by varying the correspondence information set in the determination area according to the result of one advantageous determination, the determination area is associated with the advantageous determination in a one-to-one relationship. It is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which a plurality of pieces of correspondence information are set in overlapping areas.

Feature A10. In the advantageous state, a notification state (AT mode) is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executed, or the execution probability is improved,
When the result of the advantage determination executed based on the trigger result (specific combination) predetermined as the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the correspondence result, the first specific process is performed and the notification state is entered. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that it is configured to allow transition.

According to the above configuration, the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the trigger result, and the advantageous judgment is made, and if the advantageous judgment is won, then the transition to the notification state occurs as the first specific processing. In other words, the trigger result is a sign that a transition to the notification state may occur. Therefore, even in the configuration in which the transition to the notification state is caused by using the configuration in which the correspondence information is set in the judgment area, the trigger for setting the correspondence information becomes easy to understand, and the player can easily understand when the trigger for setting occurs. After that, the game is played with a great sense of anticipation. Therefore, the amusement of the game is favorably improved.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the first specific process is a process for starting the notification state.

According to the above configuration, when it becomes a trigger result and an advantageous determination is won, the corresponding information corresponding to the first scheduled number of games is set, and when the first specific number corresponding to the first scheduled number of games is reached, the notification state transition to Therefore, by increasing the interest in the game from the trigger result to the transition to the notification state, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the information set in the determination information.

Feature A12. In the advantageous state, a notification state (AT mode) is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executed, or the execution probability is improved,
When the result of the advantage determination executed based on the trigger result (specific combination) predetermined as the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the non-corresponding result, the transition to the notification state is likely to occur. The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A11, characterized in that a process for transitioning to a state and ending the high transition state is executed as the second specific process.

According to the above configuration, the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes the trigger result, and an advantageous judgment is made. End processing of the high transition state is performed as the second specific processing. That is, the trigger result serves as a trigger for transition to the high transition state and a trigger for termination of the high transition state. By doing so, even if the winning determination is not successful, it is possible to maintain the sense of anticipation for the game.

In particular, when this configuration is applied to feature A10, when the advantageous determination based on the trigger result is won, the state is shifted to the notification state, and when the advantageous determination based on the trigger result is not won, the high to the notification state. It is possible to implement a configuration such as shifting to the transition state by using correspondence information set in the determination area. Therefore, such playability can be realized with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature A13. In the advantageous state, a notification state (AT mode) is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means is executed, or the execution probability is improved,
Characteristic A9, characterized in that, when the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is the corresponding result, the first specific process is performed to increase the number of continuous games in the informing state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the first specific process corresponds to a so-called add-on process of increasing the number of continuous games in the notification state. In other words, when the advantageous determination is won, it becomes difficult for the notification state to end, and an event favorable to the player occurs. With regard to such playability as well, it is possible to realize the playability with a relatively simple configuration by using a configuration in which correspondence information is set in the determination area.

Feature A14. Characteristic feature A13, characterized in that, when the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is the non-corresponding result, the second specific process is performed to reduce the number of continuous games in the informing state. game machine.

According to the above configuration, the second specific process is a process of decreasing the number of continuous games in the notification state. In this case, if the winning is not won in the advantageous determination, the notification state is likely to end, and an undesirable event for the player occurs. With regard to such playability as well, it is possible to realize the playability with a relatively simple configuration by using a configuration in which correspondence information is set in the determination area.

Feature A15. The first scheduled number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set by the first corresponding information setting means and the second scheduled number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set by the second corresponding information setting means have a common number of games. and
The number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means becomes equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the first specific number and the second specific number, and each specific process by the first specific process executing means and the second specific process executing means The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A14, characterized in that the corresponding specific process is executed in the possible game in which the execution of .

According to the above configuration, the first specific opportunity occurs when the advantageous judgment based on the opportunity result is won, and the second specific opportunity occurs when the advantageous judgment is not won. , either the first specific process or the second specific process is performed with the same number of games played. By doing so, in the game from when the trigger result is reached to when the first specific number or the second specific number is reached, the result of the advantageous determination is predicted, etc. In order to improve the degree of attention to the game , the effect of increasing the degree of attention can be expected with a relatively simple configuration.

Moreover, in the above configuration, even if the first specific process and the second specific process are not executed in the game with the first specific number and the second specific number, the first specific process and the second specific process are performed after that. Since the corresponding specific process is executed in the possible game in which the process is executed, it is possible to prevent the event that the specific process is never executed.

Feature A16. The first scheduled number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set by the first corresponding information setting means and the second scheduled number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set by the second corresponding information setting means have a common number of games. and
When the specific game in which the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means corresponds to the number of games corresponding to the first specific number and the second specific number is a predetermined first game, the first specific process While each specific process is executed by the executing means and the second specific process executing means, when the specific game is a second game different from the first game, the first specific process executing means and the second specific process The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A14, wherein each specific process by the process execution means is avoided.

According to the above configuration, the first specific opportunity occurs when the advantageous judgment based on the opportunity result is won, and the second specific opportunity occurs when the advantageous judgment is not won. , either the first specific process or the second specific process is performed with the same number of games played. By doing so, in the game from when the trigger result is reached to when the first specific number or the second specific number is reached, the result of the advantageous determination is predicted, etc. In order to improve the degree of attention to the game , the effect of increasing the degree of attention can be expected with a relatively simple configuration.

Moreover, in the above configuration, if the first specific process or the second specific process is not executed in the game with the first specific number or the second specific number, the execution of the specific process is avoided. Therefore, depending on the contents of the first specific process and the second specific process, it is possible to implement not only a game in which these specific processes are executed, but also a game in which the execution of these specific processes is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the attention to the advantageous determination based on the trigger result.

In addition, the invention described in the features A1 to A16 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc. are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, for each configuration of the features A1 to A16, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D9, and features E1 to E9 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, game value giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) for giving a predetermined number of game values as a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means (main control means) capable of executing mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
a game number grasping means (advantage section game number AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means becomes a specific number, a specific process execution means (main controller) capable of executing a specific process (specific process relating to an instruction function) relating to the mode notification by the mode notification means 101 for executing AT mode start processing, CZ mode end processing, special zone end processing, etc.);
with
A first game (a game with a specific prescribed number of bets according to a gaming state) in which at least the mode notification by the mode notification means and the execution of the specific process by the specific process execution means are permitted; a second game (a game with a bet number other than a specific prescribed number according to the game state) in which execution of the specific process by the specific process executing means is restricted;
is set and
The game number grasping means grasps the number of games including the first game and the second game,
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means reaches the specific number in the second game, execution of the specific process by the specific process execution means is put on hold until the first game is played. Standby means (function for executing processing for starting the AT mode after the number of games in the advantageous section AG reaches the number of games in the AT start determination area in the AT start game determination processing by the main controller 101) is provided. Amusement machine.

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is followed. Different benefits can be given to the player by making the player perform the operation. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the superiority of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and a sense of anticipation is given to the transition to the advantageous state. You can play a game while playing. Moreover, in this gaming machine, when the number of games in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, since it is configured to execute specific processing related to mode notification, depending on the content of the specific processing performed when the specific number is reached, , the player may look forward to reaching that particular number.

Here, in this gaming machine, since the first game in which execution of mode notification and specific processing is allowed and the second game in which execution of mode notification and specific processing is restricted are set, for example, It is possible for a player to play a game with a game property using mode information as designed, such as switching to a second game in a situation in which the mode information should not be performed according to the progress of the game.

However, the number of games played in an advantageous state is grasped by the number-of-games grasping means, and the number-of-games grasping means grasps the number of games including both the first game and the second game. Therefore, when the specific number is reached in the second game, the specific process cannot be executed in the game in which the specific number is reached. Therefore, in this gaming machine, since the waiting means is provided, the execution of the specific process is put on standby until the first game, and even though the specific process is executed after reaching the specific number, Regardless, it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience that the specific process is not performed due to playing the second game.

Feature B2. In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, corresponding information corresponding to the specific number is placed in a predetermined determination area (for example, AT start determination area). Corresponding information setting means for setting (for example, a function for executing processing such as setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main control device 101),
The specific process executing means executes the specific process when the number of games ascertained by the number of game ascertaining means is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set in the determination area. The gaming machine according to feature B1, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the specific trigger occurs, the correspondence information is set in the determination area. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the fact that the specific trigger has occurred until the specific process is executed, and the presence or absence of the correspondence information is not required. By grasping it, it becomes possible to judge that it has already occurred after the specific trigger has occurred. Moreover, if the number of games in the advantageous state is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set in the determination area, the specific process is executed, so that not only the occurrence of the specific opportunity but also the specific opportunity After the occurrence of the event, the correspondence between the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means and the determination area is a situation before execution of the specific process or a situation in which the specific process should be executed. It is possible to make a determination based only on the information, and it is possible to expect the effect of the feature A1 while simplifying the configuration.

Feature B3. When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means reaches a predetermined upper limit number, the ending means for ending the advantageous state and shifting to the normal state (upper limit number of games by main controller 101) A function that executes processing for the end of the advantageous section based on the arrival),
initialization means for executing predetermined initialization processing (function for executing initialization processing for advantageous section information by main controller 101);
with
Characteristic feature B2, characterized in that when the initialization process is executed by the initialization means, information corresponding to the number of games larger than the upper limit number is set as the initial information in the determination area. game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the initial information of the judgment area is set to the information corresponding to the number of games larger than the upper limit number of the advantageous state, the specific processing is executed without the occurrence of the specific trigger in the advantageous state. It is possible to preferably avoid that the

Feature B4. The specific process executing means is
a first specific process executing means (a function of executing a process for starting the AT mode by the main controller 101) for executing the first specific process as the specific process;
A second specific process executing means (function for executing a process for ending CZ by the main controller 101) for executing a second specific process different from the first specific process as the specific process;
with
The correspondence information setting means
When a first specific opportunity (AT mode transition win) occurs as the specific opportunity, the first correspondence information as the correspondence information is set in the first judgment area (AT start judgment area) of the judgment areas. a first correspondence information setting means (a function of executing a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main controller 101);
When a second specific trigger (CZ mode transition winning) different from the first specific trigger occurs as the specific trigger, a second determination region different from the first determination region of the determination regions ( second correspondence information setting means for setting second correspondence information as the correspondence information in the CZ end determination area) (function for executing processing for setting the number of games in the CZ end determination area by the main control device 101);
with
The first specific process executing means executes the first specific process when the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means is greater than or equal to the number of games corresponding to the first correspondence information. ,
The second specific process executing means executes the second specific process when the number of games ascertained by the number of game ascertaining means is greater than or equal to the number of games corresponding to the second correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, by providing a plurality of types of determination areas, when the number of games in an advantageous state becomes the number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set in each determination area, the corresponding specific processing is performed. Even with a configuration in which a plurality of types of specific processing are performed with different numbers of games played, it is possible to expect effects from a relatively simple configuration such as feature B2.

Feature B5. An event advantageous to the player occurs by performing the first specific process,
The gaming machine according to feature B4, wherein the execution of the second specific process causes an event disadvantageous to the player or an event less advantageous to the player than when the first specific process is executed.

According to the above configuration, the first specific process and the second specific process are processes for causing an event with completely different advantages for the player. By using a plurality of areas for judgment as described above, it is possible to carry out each process in parallel while using the number of games grasped by the same number-of-games grasping means.

Feature B6. Means for grasping that the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means has reached the specific number in the second game (the number of advantageous interval games AG is judged by the specific area judgment processing by the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, further comprising: a function of executing determination processing that the number of games set in each area of the game information storage area 106f has been reached.

According to the above configuration, when the number of games reaches the specific number in the second game, in the configuration in which the execution of the specific process waits until the first game, reaching the specific number itself means that the number of games has reached the specific number in the second game. Even if there is, it will be understood. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that the execution of the specific process is on standby. Compared to a configuration that makes it possible to grasp that it has been reached, there is a grace period for executing the specific process in the first game, so there is no temporary increase in the processing load in performing the specific process. Avoidance is also possible.

Feature B7. When it is grasped that the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means has reached the specific number, specific information storage means for storing specific information (for example, processing to set the CZ end flag by the main control device 101 is executed function),
The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the specific process executing means executes the specific process when the first game is executed in a state in which the specific information is stored.

According to the above configuration, by storing the specific information when the specific number is reached in the second game, it is only necessary to check the specific information in the first game, and the number of games played again reaches the specific number. There is no need to determine whether or not the Therefore, simplification of the process in performing the specific process is achieved.

Feature B8. When the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means becomes the specific number, a special notification means (function of executing rotation effect processing by main control device 101, display A function of executing a process for performing a result effect in the continuous effect process by the control device 81),
The special notification means is capable of executing the special notification having a common notification mode when reaching the specific number in the first game and when reaching the specific number in the second game. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, regardless of whether the execution of the specific process is on standby or not, the notification mode of the special notification to be executed when the number of games in the advantageous state reaches the specific number is common. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate the need for complicated processing for adjusting the notification mode of the special notification based on the waiting for the execution of the specific processing, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Feature B9. In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, corresponding information corresponding to the specific number is placed in a predetermined determination area (for example, AT start determination area). Corresponding information setting means for setting (for example, a function for executing processing such as setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main control device 101),
The specific process executing means executes the specific process when the number of games ascertained by the number of game ascertaining means is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the corresponding information set in the determination area. and
This game machine is
a first control device (main control device 101) having at least the game number grasping means, the corresponding information setting means, and the specific processing executing means;
a second control device (display control device 81) having at least the special notification means;
and
When the corresponding information is set by the corresponding information setting means, the first control device outputs corresponding number information corresponding to the number of games up to the specific number to the second control device (main control device). 101 to output a precursor command),
The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the special notification means executes the special notification based on the corresponding number information output from the output means.

According to the above configuration, when the specific trigger occurs, the correspondence information is set on the first control device side, and the specific process execution means is based on the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means and the correspondence information. In addition to performing the specific processing, the second control device that performs the special notification is configured to execute the special notification based on the correspondence number information output from the first control device when the correspondence information is set. Therefore, there is no need for a configuration for determining whether or not the number of games has reached the specific number during the period from the occurrence of the specific trigger until the specific number is reached in performing the special notification. That is, regardless of whether the game up to the specific number is the first game or the second game, if it is configured to execute special notification based on the corresponding number information received when the specific trigger occurs, unnecessary It is possible to execute a special notification in a game scheduled to perform specific processing without adding any configuration.

Feature B10. The first control device is
Means for grasping that the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means has reached the specific number in the second game (the number of advantageous interval games AG is judged by the specific area judgment processing by the main controller 101) a function of executing determination processing that the number of games set in each area of the game information storage area 106f has been reached;
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means reaches the specific number, a specific notification means (a function of executing a rotation effect process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific notification (rotation effect);
with
The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the special notification means executes the special notification in a game in which the specific notification is performed by the specific notification means.

According to the above configuration, when the number of games in the advantageous state reaches the specific number, even if the game reached is the second game, the specific notification is executed on the first control device side, and the second control device side A special announcement is made. In such a configuration, the first control device side performs specific notification using the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means, and the second control device side responds to the corresponding number information output from the first control device side. In order to make a special notification based on this, by sharing each function among a plurality of control devices, it is possible to synchronize each notification performed by a plurality of control devices while avoiding a local increase in the processing load. It becomes possible.

Feature B11. Advantageous determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main control unit 101) for executing advantageous determination of causing an advantageous event (AT mode shift) advantageous to the player,
the specific process by the specific process execution means is a process for causing the advantageous event;
The correspondence information setting means sets the correspondence information based on the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means being a correspondence result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
After executing a predetermined notification (attack effect or attacked effect in a continuous effect) over a plurality of games based on the corresponding number information, the special notification means performs the specific number of games according to the corresponding number information. It is a configuration for grasping and executing the special notification based on
When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a non-response result corresponding to the fact that the advantageous event does not occur, the predetermined notification is executed, and the result of the advantageous determination that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification Second special notification means (display A function to execute continuous production based on the pseudo precursor production table by the control device 81),
The special notification means and the second special notification means are capable of executing the common predetermined notification and the special notification in both the first game and the second game. The gaming machine according to B9 or feature B10.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the determination result by the advantage determination means is notified by a special notification after a predetermined notification, in a so-called continuous effect, even if the result of the advantageous determination is winning, it is not winning. However, a similar continuous effect is executed halfway. Then, in these continuous effects, regardless of whether the first game or the second game is played, a common continuous effect is executed. It has a configuration that affects the number of games played up to , and it is possible to avoid the phenomenon that the execution timing of the specific process and the continuous effect occur. becomes difficult to understand.

Feature B12. Means for waiting the special notification executed by the special notification means when the specific number is reached in the second game, at least until the next game is played in the first game (display control device 81 The gaming machine according to any one of features B8 to B11, further comprising a function of executing processing for continuing the AT notification effect until the AT start effect is executed.

The case where the special notification is performed in the second game means that the number of games in an advantageous state has reached a specific number, although the specific process has not been executed. That is, after that, when the first game is played, the specific process is executed. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the executed special notification is continued until the first game is performed. It becomes the structure with which the special alert|report was matched. If the special notification is not continued until the execution of the specific process, the player may misunderstand that the right to perform the specific process has been extinguished through the termination of the special notification. In this regard, the configuration described above makes it possible for the user to easily understand that the execution of the specific process is being carried over.

Feature B13. In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, corresponding information corresponding to the specific number is placed in a predetermined determination area (for example, AT start determination area). Corresponding information setting means to be set (for example, a function of executing a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main control device 101);
Advantage determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by the main controller 101) for executing an advantage determination for generating an advantageous event (AT mode transition) that is advantageous to the player;
with
the specific process by the specific process execution means is a process for causing the advantageous event;
The correspondence information setting means sets the correspondence information based on the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means being a correspondence result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
Means ( function to execute transition processing to CZ mode by main controller 101),
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is executed in the first game but not in the second game.

According to the above configuration, when the advantageous judgment is won, the corresponding information is set in the judgment area, and when the specific number is reached, the specific processing for causing the advantageous event is executed. If there is, it may shift to a high-advantage state in which it is easier to win the advantageous determination, and the advantageous determination is not executed in the second game. Then, after the advantageous judgment is made, if the game up to the specific number is digested in the second game, if the result of the previous advantageous judgment is non-winning, it will be in a high advantageous state. It will reach a certain number without being able to receive the benefits of In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to play the first game from the time when the advantageous determination is made until the specific number is reached, including the case where the result of the advantageous determination is no winning. By doing so, after the corresponding information is set in the judgment area, the second game is less likely to be played, and the execution of the specific process is more likely to be performed in the game reaching the specific number.

Feature B14. In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, corresponding information corresponding to the specific number is placed in a predetermined determination area (for example, AT start determination area). Corresponding information setting means to be set (for example, a function of executing a process of setting the number of games in the AT start determination area by the main control device 101);
First advantage determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) for executing a first advantage determination to cause a first advantage event (AT mode shift) that is advantageous to the player;
After the occurrence of the first advantageous event, a second advantageous determination is made to cause a second advantageous event (AT addition) that is different from the first advantageous event and is advantageous to the player. Advantageous determination means (function for executing AT addition processing by main controller 101);
with
the specific process by the specific process execution means is a process for causing the first advantageous event;
The correspondence information setting means sets the correspondence information on the basis that the result of the first advantageous determination by the first advantageous determination means is a first response result corresponding to the occurrence of the first advantageous event. is a
When the result of the first advantageous determination by the first advantageous determination means is the first correspondence result, the result of the second advantageous determination by the second advantageous determination means corresponds to causing the second advantageous event. 2. Equipped with a means (function for executing transition processing to a specialized zone by the main controller 101) that can shift to a highly advantageous state that is likely to result in 2 correspondence,
The game according to any one of features B1 to B13, characterized in that the second advantage judgment by the second advantage judgment means is executed in the first game but not executed in the second game. machine.

According to the above configuration, when the first advantageous determination is won, the corresponding information is set in the determination area, and when the specified number is reached, the specific process for causing the first advantageous event is executed. If the advantageous judgment is won, there is a case where the game moves to a highly advantageous state in which it becomes easier to win the second advantageous judgment that causes a second advantageous event different from the first advantageous event, and in addition, in the second game, it is The second advantageous determination is not executed. Then, after the first advantageous determination is made, if the game up to the specific number is completed in the second game, it will shift to the case where the result of the first advantageous determination is winning. It will reach a certain number without being able to receive the benefits of a high advantage state. In other words, it is more advantageous for the player to finish the game as the first game until the specific number is reached after the first advantage judgment is made. By doing so, after the corresponding information is set in the judgment area, the second game is less likely to be played, and the execution of the specific process is more likely to be performed in the game reaching the specific number.

Feature B15. Bet amount setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion port 45) for setting the game bet amount,
The lottery means performs the lottery according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means,
The expected increase, which is the average value per game of the difference between the game value imparted by the game value imparting means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, is higher than that in the first game. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B14, wherein the gaming machine is set so that the game is higher.

According to the above configuration, although mode notification and specific processing are not performed in the second game, the expected increase in the game value per game is greater than in the first game. A situation may occur in which it is more advantageous for the player to play the game as the second game. In other words, there may occur a scene in which the specific processing cannot be performed in the game that reaches the specific number. By applying the configuration of feature B1 to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience caused by the fact that the specific process cannot be performed in the second game.

It should be noted that the invention described in the above features B1 to B15 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, for each configuration of the features B1 to B15, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D9, and features E1 to E9 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game;
Lottery means (executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. function) and
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, game value giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) for giving a predetermined number of game values as a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means (main control means) capable of executing mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
a game number grasping means (advantage section game number AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state;
In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, the number of scheduled games to execute the specific process related to the mode notification by the mode notification means (specific process related to the instruction function) , correspondence information setting means for setting correspondence information in a predetermined determination area (for example, an AT start determination area) (for example, a function of executing a process of setting the number of games in an AT start determination area by the main controller 101) )When,
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means becomes a specific number as a scheduled number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area, the specific process can be executed. Processing execution means (function for executing AT mode start processing, CZ mode end processing, special zone end processing, etc. by main controller 101);
In a specific game in which the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means is the specific number, an avoidance means (main controller 101) for avoiding execution of the specific process by the specific process execution means based on a player's specific operation If the game in which the number of games AG in the advantageous interval is the number of games set in the determination information storage area 106f is not a game with a specific prescribed number of bets, the corresponding specific process is not executed); ,
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is followed. Different benefits can be given to the player by making the player perform the operation. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the superiority of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and a sense of anticipation is given to the transition to the advantageous state. You can play a game while playing. Moreover, in this gaming machine, when the number of games in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, since it is configured to execute specific processing related to mode notification, depending on the content of the specific processing performed when the specific number is reached, , the player may look forward to reaching that particular number. In this case, when the specific trigger occurs, the correspondence information is set in the judgment area so that the specific processing relating to the mode notification is executed when the number of games played in an advantageous state reaches a specific number. In a configuration in which the specific process is executed after that, there is no need to store that the specific trigger has occurred until the specific process is executed, and the specific trigger has already occurred by grasping the presence or absence of the corresponding information. The number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means, such as the situation after the specific trigger has occurred and before the specific process is executed, the situation in which the specific process should be executed, etc. It becomes possible to make a judgment only by the correspondence information of the judgment area, and it is possible to simplify the configuration.

Furthermore, when the number of games played in the advantageous state reaches a specific number in this way, a specific process relating to the mode notification is executed, and when the number of games reaches the specific number, the player can be identified. Since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the execution of the specific processing based on the operation, the player determines whether or not to perform the specific operation based on the content of the specific processing. can be realized. Moreover, since the specific process is executed according to the correspondence information set in the determination area and the number of games played, even if the execution of the specific process is avoided, the number of games corresponds to the correspondence information. Since the specific process is not executed when the specified process is exceeded, there is no need to erase the information as in the case of storing the information for executing the specific process. It is possible to realize novel playability.

Feature C2. When the execution of the specific process is avoided by the avoiding means, the correspondence information set in the determination area is maintained, and the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means corresponds to the correspondence information. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein execution of the specific process by the specific process executing means is avoided even after the number of games has exceeded the number of games played.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the execution of the specific process is avoided when the number of games reaches the specific number, the correspondence information set in the determination area is maintained as it is (not deleted), and after that, It is clarified that the specific process is not performed even in the game of .

Feature C3. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined transition result, and the pattern combination for transition corresponding to the transition result stops at the valid position, the game state can be continued over a plurality of games. Equipped with special transition means (function for executing bonus state processing by main controller 101) for transitioning to a state,
The special state is a state included in the advantageous state,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein each game in the special state is a game in which the specific operation is performed.

According to the above configuration, when the pattern combination for transition stops when the transition result is won, in the configuration that transitions to a special state as a so-called bonus state, each game in the special state is a game in which a specific operation is performed. If the specified number is reached during the special state, execution of the specified process will be avoided. By doing so, if the transition result is won before the specific number is reached, whether or not to cause the transition to the special state is determined by the number of games up to the specific number or the advantage of the specific process. (Whether or not it is necessary to avoid) can be used as a basis for determination, making it possible to make the game more interesting.

Feature C4. The expected increase, which is the average value per game of the difference between the game value imparted by the game value imparting means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, is increased by shifting to the special state. The gaming machine according to feature C3, which is set to be greater than the state up to.

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the special state, the expected increase number, which is the average value per game of the difference between the game value to be given and the number of bets to be set, increases, so that a specific trigger is generated. After that, from the viewpoint of increasing or losing the game value in the game up to the specific number, it is advantageous for the player to complete the game up to the specific number in the special state. On the other hand, as described above, since the execution of the specific process is avoided in the special state, the transition to the special state is made depending on the increase/loss of the game value up to the specific number and the presence or absence of the execution of the specific process. It is possible to determine whether or not to play the game, and the number of items to be considered by the player increases, thereby making the game more interesting.

Feature C5. As the special state, a first special state in which the number of continuous games can be greater than the number of games played from the occurrence of the specific opportunity to the specific number, and from the occurrence of the specific opportunity to the specific number. A gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4, characterized in that a second special state is set in which the number of games played can be less than the number of games played.

According to the above configuration, when the transition to the first special state is made after the occurrence of the specific trigger, the execution of the specific process is avoided regardless of the number of games played up to the specific number when the transition is made, and the transition to the second special state is made. Execution of the specific process may or may not be avoided depending on the number of games up to the specific number at the time of transition. By doing so, it is possible for the player to consider whether or not to transition to the special state based on the relationship with the degree of advantage of the specific process, including the type of special state to be transitioned.

Feature C6. The specific process executing means is
a first specific process executing means (a function of executing a specific additional process by the main controller 101) for executing a first specific process that causes a first event advantageous to the player as the specific process;
Second specific process execution means (for subtraction by main controller 101) for executing a second specific process that causes a second event that is disadvantageous to the player or less advantageous to the player than the first event as the specific process function to execute the processing of
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, as the specific process, there are the first specific process and the second specific process that respectively cause the first event and the second event that differ in the degree of advantage for the player. Each game is selected by a specific operation according to the player's intention, such as not avoiding when the first specific process on the side is performed and avoiding when the second specific process on the disadvantageous side is performed. Such playability can be realized. By doing so, it is possible to realize an interesting game property using the specific process that can be executed by setting the correspondence information in the judgment area.

Feature C7. When the specific opportunity occurs, in the specific game, a plurality of specific processes including the first specific process by the first specific process executing means and the second specific process by the second specific process executing means A configuration in which any one of the specified processes is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the avoiding means avoids execution of any of the specific processes when the specific operation is performed in the specific game.

According to the above configuration, when a specific opportunity occurs, it is determined whether to execute the advantageous first specific process or the disadvantageous second specific process, and the specific operation is performed in the specific game. In this case, execution of the specific process is avoided regardless of which specific process is performed. By doing so, while determining which specific process is the set specific process, if the specific process on the disadvantageous side is set, or if that possibility is high, , the execution of the specific process is avoided, and if the specific process on the advantageous side is set, or if the possibility is high, the specific process is executed, thereby realizing a thrilling game. .

Feature C8. Means for storing specific information corresponding to the type of specific processing to be executed in the specific game (e.g., specific additional winning flag) when the specific opportunity occurs,
According to feature C6 or feature C7, wherein the correspondence information setting means is configured to set common correspondence information in the judgment area regardless of the type of specific processing executed in the specific game. game machine.

According to the above configuration, by using the specific information corresponding to the type of the specific process, it is not necessary to change the correspondence information set in the determination area according to the type of the specific process, and the determination area can be shared. can be done.

Feature C9. Provided with suggestive notification means (a function of executing a suggestive effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing a suggestive report corresponding to the type of the specific process to be executed in the specific game when the specific process occurs. The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C8, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to avoid the execution of the specific process by performing the specific operation in the specific game, from the suggestive notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize game characteristics such as predicting the content of the specific process and determining whether or not to avoid execution of the specific process.

Feature C10. The first specific process executing means executes, as the first specific process, a process of adding the number of games that can be played in the advantageous state,
The game according to any one of features C6 to C9, wherein the second specific process executing means executes, as the second specific process, subtraction processing for subtracting the number of games that can be played in the advantageous state. machine.

According to the above configuration, as the specific processing, when the first specific processing is performed, the number of games that can be played in an advantageous state is added, and when the second specific processing is performed, the number of games that can be played in an advantageous state is added. is subtracted. With such a configuration, the player determines whether the first specific process is performed or the second specific process is performed in an advantageous state, and selects whether or not to avoid the execution of the specific process. By using such a configuration, it is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as how to continue the advantageous state (how to increase the number of games without reducing it). Therefore, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the invention described in the features C1 to C10 is known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, for each configuration of the features C1 to C10, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of features A1 to A16, features B1 to B15, features C1 to C10, features D1 to D9, and features E1 to E9 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game;
Lottery means (executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. function) and
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, game value giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) for giving a predetermined number of game values as a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means (main control means) capable of executing mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the device 101),
An advantageous state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
Advantageous transition means (function for executing AT start processing by main controller 101) for transitioning from the normal state to the advantageous state when a predetermined transition opportunity occurs;
Advantageous termination means (a function of executing AT termination processing by the main controller 101) for shifting from the advantageous state to the normal state when the number of games that can be played is played in the advantageous state;
In the specific game in the advantageous state, execution of a specific process capable of executing a specific process that is either a process of adding the number of games that can be played in the advantageous state or a subtraction process that subtracts the number of games that can be played in the advantageous state Means (function for executing specific addition processing or subtraction processing by main controller 101);
In the specific game, avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the specific process based on a specific operation by the player (a function for avoiding a specific add-on process or a subtraction process due to a bet number that is not a specific prescribed number by the main control device 101);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is followed. Different benefits can be given to the player by making the player perform the operation. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the superiority of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and a sense of anticipation is given to the transition to the advantageous state. You can play a game while playing. Moreover, in this gaming machine, either the addition processing or the subtraction processing of the number of games may be performed in a specific game in an advantageous state. Therefore, if the addition process is performed, the advantageous state will continue for a longer time, while if the subtraction process is performed, the advantageous state can end early. The exact opposite effect will occur, and it is possible to draw a high degree of interest in which process is performed.

Moreover, in the specific game in which the above-mentioned addition processing and subtraction processing are performed, it is possible to avoid execution of these addition processing and subtraction processing based on the player's specific operation. Linking the player's intuition with the game operation, such as performing the specific operation if the player feels that the possibility of additional processing is high, and not performing the specific operation if he feels that the additional processing is likely to be performed. It is possible to realize a more interesting game.

The "subtraction process" may also be expressed as "subtraction process for subtracting the number of games that can be played in the advantageous state from the number of games executed in the advantageous state".

Feature D2. In the game before the specific game, content lottery means for drawing lots for the content of the specific process including the add-on process and the subtraction process (function for executing the specific add-on lottery process by the main control device 101),
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the specific process execution means executes the specific process of the content selected by the content lottery means in the specific game.

According to the above configuration, since it is determined in the game before the specific game which of the addition process and the subtraction process is executed as the specific process, it is too late to perform the specific operation in the specific game. , etc. do not occur, and the playability of the feature D1 can be suitably realized.

Feature D3. Bet amount setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion port 45) for setting the game bet amount based on the player's operation,
The avoidance means sets the bet number set by the bet amount setting means to a specific number corresponding to the gaming state in the specific game, thereby allowing the execution of the specific process in the specific game, and the bet amount setting means The game according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized in that making the number of bets different from the specified number according to the gaming state is the specified operation, and the execution of the specified process in the specified game is avoided. machine.

According to the above configuration, the addition process or the subtraction process is executed or avoided based on the number of bets, so it is possible to avoid these processes with a relatively easy operation. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the execution of the specific process cannot be avoided due to the difficulty of the specific operation, even though the execution is desired to be avoided.

Feature D4. The mode notification means can execute the mode notification in a game in which the specific number of bets is set by the bet amount setting means, and the bet amount setting means sets a different number of bets than the specific number. The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized in that it is configured such that execution of the mode notification is disabled in the set game.

According to the above configuration, by combining the number of bets at which execution of the specific process is permitted or avoided with the number of bets at which the execution of the mode notification by the mode notification means is permitted or restricted, the execution of the specific process is determined. Affinity between presence/absence of state notification and state notification is enhanced, and it becomes easier for players to accept it. is also possible.

Feature D5. In the game before the specific game, content lottery means for drawing lots for the content of the specific process including the add-on process and the subtraction process (function for executing the specific add-on lottery process by the main control device 101),
The specific process execution means is configured to execute the specific process of the content selected by the content lottery means in the specific game,
The content lottery means is characterized in that, after the specific process is executed by the specific process execution means, it is possible to draw lots for a specific game for executing the next specific process and the contents of the specific process. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

According to the above configuration, the specific process is periodically performed in an advantageous state, and even if the subtraction process is performed in one specific game, the number of games is added to the next specific game. Since there is also a possibility that the will be revived, it is possible to keep the game from becoming boring during the advantageous state.

Feature D6. After the specific process is executed by the specific process execution means, the number of games up to the specific game in which the next specific process is executed is the maximum increase in the number of games when the additional process is performed as the specific process and the The gaming machine according to feature D5, wherein the number of games is set to be smaller than the maximum number of subtraction games when the subtraction process is performed as the specific process.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to more preferably expect the effect of keeping the game from becoming boring in the feature D5.

Feature D7. Bet amount setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion port 45) for setting the game bet amount based on the player's operation,
The avoidance means sets the bet number set by the bet amount setting means to a specific number corresponding to the gaming state in the specific game, thereby allowing the execution of the specific process in the specific game, and the bet amount setting means setting the number of bets to a number different from the specific number according to the gaming state as the specific operation, and avoiding execution of the specific process in the specific game;
The content lottery means draws lots for the content of the specific process in a game in which the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is set to the specific number according to the game state, and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means is set to the game state. The gaming machine according to feature D5 or feature D6, wherein a lottery for the content of the specific process is not executed in a game with a number different from the specific number corresponding to the number.

According to the above configuration, the lottery for the content of the specific processing is matched to whether or not the specific processing is executed, so that the content of the next specific processing is not determined even though the specific processing has been performed. It is possible to prevent such an event that the content of the next specific process is determined even though the specific process is not performed.

Feature D8. When the execution of the specific process is avoided by the avoiding means, the content lottery means selects the content of the specific process in the game executed with the specific number of bets corresponding to the game state. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein a lottery is drawn for

According to the above configuration, when the execution of the specific process is avoided, the lottery for the content of the next specific process is performed in the next game with the specific number of bets. In this way, the execution of the specific process is avoided by the number of bets, and the lottery for the contents of the specific process is not performed with the bet number that avoids the execution of the specific process. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the content of the next specific process is not easily decided even though the execution is avoided.

Feature D9. In the game before the specific game, content lottery means for drawing lots for the content of the specific process including the add-on process and the subtraction process (function for executing the specific add-on lottery process by the main control device 101),
The specific process execution means is configured to execute the specific process of the content selected by the content lottery means in the specific game,
In the game after the lottery by the content lottery means is performed and before the specific processing is executed, a suggestion notification suggesting the lottery result by the content lottery means can be executed by a predetermined notification means. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that it has a suggestive notification means (a function of executing a process for performing a suggestive effect by the display control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not to avoid the execution of the specific process by performing the specific operation in the specific game, from the suggestive notification. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize game characteristics such as predicting the content of the specific process and determining whether or not to avoid execution of the specific process.

It should be noted that the inventions described in the features D1 to D9 are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, for each configuration of the features D1 to D9, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D9, and the features E1 to E9 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
bet number setting means (credit insertion switches 56, 57, medal insertion slot 45) for setting the number of bets for a game;
Lottery means (executing lottery processing by the main controller 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player according to the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means based on the operation of the starting operation means. function) and
stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main controller 101) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of each of the winding bodies when the stop operation means is operated function to perform processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, game value giving means (function for executing payout determination processing by the main controller 101) for giving a predetermined number of game values as a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the stop operation means is a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. A specific result (for example, a pressing order bell) is set in which a second operation result that can be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result by being operated in the operation mode is set,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specified result, mode notification means (main control means) capable of executing mode notification regarding the operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means a function of executing the pressing order notification process by the device 101),
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification means cannot be executed are set,
A game number grasping means (advantage section game number AG) for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous state,
A first game (a game with a specific prescribed number of bets according to a gaming state) in which at least the mode notification by the mode notification means and the execution of the specific process by the specific process execution means are allowed, and the mode notification means a second game (a game with a bet number other than a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state) in which execution of the specific process by the specific process executing means is restricted;
is set and
The game number grasping means grasps the number of games including the first game and the second game,
The expected increase, which is the average value per game of the difference between the game value imparted by the game value imparting means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, is higher than that in the first game. It is set so that the game is higher,
In the advantageous state, when a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, AT mode transition winning) occurs, the number of scheduled games to execute the specific process related to the mode notification by the mode notification means (specific process related to the instruction function) , correspondence information setting means for setting correspondence information in a predetermined determination area (for example, an AT start determination area) (for example, a function of executing a process of setting the number of games in an AT start determination area by the main controller 101) )When,
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means becomes a specific number as a scheduled number of games corresponding to the correspondence information set in the determination area, the specific process can be executed. Processing execution means (function for executing AT mode start processing, CZ mode end processing, special zone end processing, etc. by main controller 101);
At least after the occurrence of the specific opportunity, a predetermined game is played until the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches the specific number, more than when the second game is played, the first game is played. A specifying means (means for setting a special zone based on winning the AT mode transition by the main control device 101) capable of making it more advantageous for the player when the
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, at the time of winning a specific result in which the winning result may differ depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means, since the mode notification of the stop operation may be performed by the predetermined notification means, the mode notification is followed. Different benefits can be given to the player by making the player perform the operation. In this case, by providing an advantageous state in which mode notification is possible and a normal state in which mode notification is not performed, the superiority of the advantageous state over the normal state is ensured, and a sense of anticipation is given to the transition to the advantageous state. You can play a game while playing. Moreover, in this gaming machine, when a specific trigger occurs in an advantageous state, when the number of games played in an advantageous state reaches a specific number, the correspondence information is set in the judgment area so that a specific process relating to the mode notification is executed. Therefore, in a configuration in which a specific process is executed after that based on a specific trigger, there is no need to store that the specific trigger has occurred until the specific process is executed. The number-of-games comprehending means confirms that the situation is after the occurrence of a specific event, that the situation is after the occurrence of a specific trigger but before the specific process is executed, or that the specific process should be executed, etc. It is possible to make a judgment based only on the number of games to be grasped and the correspondence information of the judgment area, so that the configuration can be simplified.

Here, in this gaming machine, since the first game in which execution of mode notification and specific processing is allowed and the second game in which execution of mode notification and specific processing is restricted are set, for example, It is possible for a player to play a game with a game property using mode information as designed, such as switching to a second game in a situation in which the mode information should not be performed according to the progress of the game.

However, the number of games played in an advantageous state is grasped by the number-of-games grasping means, and the number-of-games grasping means grasps the number of games including both the first game and the second game. Furthermore, the expected increase, which is the average value per game of the difference between the game value imparted by the game value imparting means and the bet amount set by the bet amount setting means, is higher in the second game than in the first game. is set to be higher, there is a possibility that the second game is played instead of the first game during the period from the occurrence of the specific opportunity until the execution of the specific process. .

Then, for example, in the case of performing an effect such as progressing in the first game but not progressing in the second game from the occurrence of the specific opportunity until the specific process is performed, the second game is performed. There may be a gap between the execution timing of the specific process and the end timing of the effect. Circumstances may also arise in which it is difficult to shift to the desired game state by the time.

Therefore, the second game is performed by providing a specifying means that the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game so as to include a predetermined game in which the specified process is performed after at least the occurrence of the specific opportunity. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience caused by the execution of the second game as described above.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the specifying means sets such that the predetermined game is more advantageous to the player than the game before the occurrence of the specified opportunity.

According to the above configuration, by further limiting the games that are advantageous, it is possible to avoid inconvenience caused by the second game without increasing the degree of advantage for the player too much. In particular, by making it more advantageous than before the specific opportunity, it is possible to motivate not to play in the second game when the specific opportunity occurs, and the effect of the feature E1 is more enhanced. Increased.

Feature E3. Advantageous determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main control unit 101) for executing advantageous determination of causing an advantageous event (AT mode shift) advantageous to the player,
The specific trigger is that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means becomes a response result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
When the result of the advantageous judgment by the advantageous judgment means is a non-corresponding result different from the corresponding result, at least if the result of the advantageous judgment is the corresponding result, it corresponds to the specific number at which the specific process is executed. Second specifying means (main control means) capable of making it more advantageous for the player when playing the first game than when playing the second game in the specific game up to the game The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, further comprising means for setting the CZ mode based on the fact that the device 101 does not win the AT mode transition.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which it is more advantageous to perform the predetermined game up to the specific determination in the first game, the specific opportunity is generated by winning in the advantageous determination, even if the advantageous determination is not won It is more advantageous to do it in the first game. Therefore, for example, on the premise that the player does not know the result of the advantageous judgment until the specific process is performed, after the advantageous judgment is made regardless of the result of the advantageous judgment, the second game is played rather than playing the second game. Since it is advantageous for the player to play the first game, it is possible to motivate the player not to play the second game. Therefore, for example, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the result of the advantageous determination is completely obvious through the absence of a shift in the performance and the transition of the game state.

Feature E4. When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determining means is a non-corresponding result different from the corresponding result, the second identifying means shifts to a highly advantageous state in which the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determining means is likely to be the corresponding result. (function for executing transition processing to CZ mode by main controller 101) capable of allowing
The gaming machine according to feature E3, wherein the advantage determination by the advantage determination means is executed in the first game, but is not executed in the second game.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature E3, and by using the above configuration, the result of the advantageous determination is likely to become a corresponding result, a configuration that transitions to a highly advantageous state as a so-called chance zone, and the advantageous determination is the first. It is possible to expect the effect of the feature E3 well while using the existing configuration such that it is executed in the game but not in the second game.

Feature E5. Predetermined notification is started based on the execution of a predetermined advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means, and the predetermined notification is made in a game in which the predetermined number of games is reached is a result notification corresponding to the result of the predetermined advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means. Special notification means for executing special notification (function for executing processing for performing continuous production by display control device 81),
A situation in which the result of the predetermined advantage determination by the advantage determination means that triggered the execution of the special notification by the special notification means is the result of non-correspondence, and the predetermined notification is performed by the special notification means. If the result of the advantage judgment by the advantage judgment means performed in is the correspondence result, the result notification corresponding to the correspondence result is performed in the game in which the result notification in the special notification being executed is performed. (a function of executing a process of setting an omen flag when an omen command is received during a continuous effect based on a pseudo omen effect table by the display control device 81);
The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a special notification is performed as a so-called continuous effect such that a predetermined notification is started with an advantageous determination as a trigger and a result notification corresponding to the result of the advantageous determination is executed, the special notification is performed. Even if the advantageous determination which is the trigger is a non-corresponding result, if the advantageous determination during the special notification results in a corresponding result, only the content is changed without changing the game for which the result notification is performed. By doing so, the result of the advantageous determination is less likely to be determined in the middle of the process in order to raise the degree of attention to the advantageous determination by the special notification. Therefore, after the specific trigger, the game up to the specific number is less likely to be completed in the second game.

Feature E6. First advantage determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main controller 101) for executing a first advantage determination to cause a first advantage event (AT mode shift) that is advantageous to the player;
After the occurrence of the first advantageous event, a second advantageous determination is made to cause a second advantageous event (AT addition) that is different from the first advantageous event and is advantageous to the player. Advantageous determination means (function for executing AT addition processing by main controller 101);
with
the specific process by the specific process execution means is a process for causing the first advantageous event;
The identifying means shifts to a highly advantageous state (specialized zone) in which the result of the second advantageous determination by the second advantageous determining means is likely to be a response result corresponding to the occurrence of the second advantageous event, and The game according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that the second advantage determination by the second advantage determination means is performed in the first game, but not performed in the second game. machine.

According to the above configuration, after winning the first advantageous determination, the state is shifted to a high advantageous state in which the probability of winning the second advantageous determination is improved, and the second advantageous determination is not performed in the second game, thereby making it possible to perform the specific game. It is more advantageous to play the predetermined game in the first game until the process is performed. By doing so, it is possible to motivate the player not to play the second game with a relatively simple configuration such as a change in the probability of the second advantageous determination and whether or not to execute the second game. Therefore, for example, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the result of the advantageous determination is completely obvious through the absence of a shift in the performance and the transition of the game state.

Feature E7. Advantageous determination means (function for executing AT lottery processing by main control unit 101) for executing advantageous determination of causing an advantageous event (AT mode shift) advantageous to the player,
The specific trigger is that the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means becomes a response result corresponding to the occurrence of the advantageous event,
When the result of the advantageous determination by the advantageous determination means is a non-corresponding result different from the corresponding result, a second specific process (CZ mode second correspondence information setting means (main controller 101 sets the number of games in the specific judgment area by setting the number of games to be played in the judgment area (specified start judgment area) as correspondence information. function to execute processing, etc.) and
When the number of games grasped by the number-of-games grasping means reaches the specific number, and when the setting trigger of the correspondence information set in the judgment area is the non-correspondence result, a second specific process executing means (a function of executing a process for ending the CZ mode by the main controller 101) capable of executing the second specific process;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the advantageous determination is won, the corresponding information is set in the determination area, and when the specified number is reached, the specific process is executed. In addition to the configuration in which the second specifying process for By sharing, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration when executing a plurality of types of processing having common execution triggers.

Feature E8. Means (for determination by main controller 101) capable of ascertaining the corresponding information set in the determination area before the number of games ascertained by the number of games ascertaining means reaches the specific number any one of features E1 to E7, characterized in that a function of executing processing for grasping that the previous game of the game corresponding to the number of games set in the information storage area 106f has become the previous game. game machine.

According to the above configuration, since it is possible to grasp the number before reaching the specific number, the extensibility of the process is greatly improved, for example, by notifying in advance that the specific process will be performed. Therefore, while simplifying the processing configuration using the judgment area, it is possible to easily apply the processing for game progress and the processing for presentation.

Feature E9. The specific processing executing means is configured to perform the above-described processing even if the first game is performed after a game in which the number of games ascertained by the number-of-games ascertaining means is the specific number is executed in the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, characterized in that it does not execute the specific processing that is executable when a specific number is reached.

According to the above configuration, when the game that reaches the specific number is completed in the second game, the specific process is not executed. It is considered that the second game including the game up to the specific number is not played so as not to be consumed in the second game. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid inconvenience caused by the second game being played.

Feature E10. Scheduled game number selection means for selecting one scheduled game number from a plurality of types of scheduled game numbers when the specific opportunity occurs (executing a process for setting the precursor game number by the main controller 101) function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, wherein the correspondence information setting means is configured to set the correspondence information according to the scheduled number of games selected by the scheduled number-of-games selection means. .

According to the above configuration, since the game in which the specific process is executed becomes difficult to understand after the specific trigger occurs, it is possible to prevent the game that reaches the specific number from being mistakenly completed in the second game. It is conceivable that the second game, including the game, will not be played. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid inconvenience caused by the second game being played.

The inventions described in the features E1 to E10 are known as "a pachinko machine, a slot machine, etc., as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a A configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. When the lever is operated, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and when the stop switch is operated while the reel is rotating, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard,” which is the problem to be solved by the present invention.

In addition, for each configuration of the features E1 to E10, the technical features shown in the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B15, the features C1 to C10, the features D1 to D9, and the features E1 to E9 It is possible to apply each idea individually, and it is also possible to apply a combination of part or all of each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature group A to feature group E to each configuration of feature group A to feature group E detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

a plurality of circular bodies to which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in a circumferential direction;
a display unit that allows visual recognition of a part of the pattern for each of the circular bodies;
a starting operation means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for granting a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
stop operation means for stopping the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when operated;
drive control means for starting the circulation of each of the circulation bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stopping the circulation of the circulation bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result, a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at a predetermined position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit. a means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising
As a lottery result by the lottery means , a first result that the first pattern combination can be stopped at the predetermined position when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode; and a second result in which a second pattern combination different from the first pattern combination can be stopped at the predetermined position when operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode. death,
A mode notification means capable of executing mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode and the second operation mode,
A specific state is set in which the mode notification by the mode notification means can be executed,
a game number grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the specific state;
a specific process execution means capable of executing a specific process related to the mode notification by the mode notification means when the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches a specific number;
a special notification means capable of executing a special notification by a predetermined notification means when the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches the specific number;
with
At least a first game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means and the specific process by the specific process execution means can be executed, and a game in which the mode notification by the mode notification means and the specific process by the specific process execution means cannot be executed . 2 games and
is set and
The game number grasping means grasps the number of games including the first game and the second game,
When the number of games grasped by the game number grasping means reaches the specific number in the second game, and then when the first game is performed, the specific process is executed by the specific process executing means. means capable of making
means capable of executing the special notification by the special notification means when the specific number is reached in the second game and then when the first game is performed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images